Home

GSK218MC series Connection and PLC Manual

1. l A i l GSK218MC DA98A B drive unit Series CNC system LES MERE CNT CN2 io i Cod P MEE mmm kal XS31 Y axis a cn tne A ue WR tee E AL tro UE an m do mod re m voe x O A Sie eros decere d q l DA98A B drive unit oar oz LL ic io Cod P mom l aci see ey XS32 Z axis ZE RCM ROCHE ERR HER l l lt le MEE l interface interface l D XS33 4 axis XS10 2 communication e COMM XS40 input 1 i O l et XS41 input2 le I O board 2 XS42input3 eT eJ rente 7 XS43 output 1 XS44 output 2 XS45 output 3 138 Chapter Two Connection between Equipments 2 2 Connection between the System and the Drive Unit The interfaces with the drive unit include XS30 X axis XS31 Y axis XS32 Z axis and XS33 the 4 axis 2 2 1 The System Interface Figure PC 24V AM26LS31 Y Y EN CP CPt DIR DIR Ale 1 DALM Fig 2 2 1 1 S D lt 2 O D O e O 139 Cr IS Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 2 2 2 The Interface Signal List XS30 DB15 female X axis XS31 DB15 female Y axis
2. 1 XCP 1 YCP 9 XGP 9 YCP 2 XDIR Z YDIR 10 XDIR 10 YDIR 9 XPG 3 YPC 11 OV 11 OV 4 24V 4 24V 12 Toy 12 5V D XDALM D YDALM 6 13 TOY 6 13 5V 14 OV 14 OV T XEN T YEN 15 OV 15 OV 8 OV 8 OV XS32 DB15 female CZ axis XS33 DB15 female 4TH aixs 1 ZUCPST 1 AGP 9 LEPE 9 4CP P ZD IIT 2 ADIR 10 ZDIR 10 ADIR 9 ZPC 3 4PC 11 OV 11 OV 4 24V 4 24V 172 Toy 12 5V D ZDALM 5 ADALM 6 13 RAV 6 13 5V 14 OV 14 OV T ZEN T 4EN 15 OV 15 OV 8 OV 8 OV Fig 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 Introduction of Signals 1 The pulse movement code signals XCP XCP YCP YCP ZCP ZCP 4CP and 4CP are code pulse signals XDIR XDIR YDIR YDIR ZDIR ZDIR 4DIR and 4DIR are movement direction signal and the signals of two groups are difference output The circuit diagram is shown as below CNC side CP S 3 D 2 O D o Fig 2 2 3 1 140 Chapter Two Connection between Equipments 2 The drive unit alarm signal ALM input The mode of signal received on the system side is shown as below Whether the high level or the low is valid can be set by the bit parameter 19 The high or the low level should comply with the drive unit 24V R 4 7K DALM Fig 2 2 3 2 3 Ready signal EN of CNC system contact output EN Fig 2 2 3 3 4 Signal PC of reference point return The
3. PA 16 PA 31 GND 2 PB 17 PB END 3 PZ 18 PZ 33 SIGN 4 ZOUT 1970UT 34 SIGN 9 SAR PAR 20 ZSP COM 6 SECT 21 COIN 36 TALM 22RDY E 8 ARST 23 COM uu g SFR 94 SON O COM 10SPO 25 SRV 0 S 11STAO 26 SP2 12 VP 21 ZSL 41SECO 42 PURS 13 GE0 28 PULS 16 14vcmD 29 AGND AA 15VCMD 30AGND VPO Fig 2 5 1 1 2 5 2 Introduction of the Interface Signals 1 VCMD and VCMD The analog command input 0 10V 2 The spindle servo input signals SON drive enable SFR CW rotation SRV CCW rotation STAO position start SECO position direction option SPO position option 0 SP1 position option 1 SP2 position option 2 SL clamp at zero speed ARST alarm reset and switch between VP speed position The spindle servo output signal PAR SAR speed position reach RDY ready ZSP output at zero speed COIN position finish ALM alarm output and VPO speed position state output 4 PA PA PB PB PZ and PZ The motor coder the spindle coder pulse A B and Z phases difference output The spindle servo output signal 5 COM and COM DC15V 24V power supplied from the external 6 ZOUT and ZOUT Z axis feedback output of the motor the spindle coder the spindle servo output signals 7 SECT Backup 8 PULS and PULS The pulse command input in position mode 3 WY 9 SIGN and SIGN The direction command input in position mode 147
4. Bee nd NC p The System Configuration and Installation S j D Q O 5 D o o na Fig 1 3 3 Installation dimension figure of GSK218MC H operation panel 133 Cr PES E E Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System User installation and machining diagram AI 2105045 qn 200 0 15 NN 10 i i i pe um N Zt q as lt a amp amp Be az me we mh eed c ty 3 re Oi 0 m ze lt 00 3 Y AT CJ 3 Ae AE gt gt APRA Nile mr m ol cau Col au E 3 l LL Q e an EN Z Em wmm le la a le el BEL f LI exd A f gt B E y S T 2 D JL we m e Es I 10 E D 3 q Oo d HERE pp O R i 5 NX d I 5 amp 12
5. ooooocooncnnncnnnnonanannnonononannnnnnos 61 Area Detecta 62 Contents CHAPTER FIVE AUTOMATICAL OPERATION I cites Se Dose tars cedens Steud aneages 64 Sm Cycle Start Feed Hold osuna 64 ZAI SEL EA qq Un T 65 X Prora RT PET 66 954 Skip ODUOHSL BIOGK watever ei aiii 68 CHAPTER SIX FEEDRATE CONTROL it Et bene altas 70 OIRR AD BETTE Rate nata le 70 PA A aa E E EET REI d dito dp dm Miete imt disco ERA di e 71 6 3 Override CancellatlOfizs udine d Ga d ais 71 CHAPTER SEVEN MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION ccc cece nennen 72 YI M Code Miscellamneous FUNCION smart lc adds 12 7 2 S Code Miscellaneous Function occccnnnnononcnccoconanananananocononanananononocnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnncnons 72 Ls T Code Miscellaneous FUN cao e Fat ec AA e etr 74 TA Miscellaneous FUNCION LOCKE i A e Edo ete A AAA AA 76 CHAPTER EIGHT SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION erm mmm 78 o I SDINGIS Speed Control Method siis brine a a eaae 78 82 NOT VAIN CN RETE 80 CHAPTER NINE PROGRAMMING CODE ccc ea AAE 81 91 User Macro TP OGM abad tosehere odo s emthus e nt Eo vehit e vo iato D e 81 Se See al giclee O c RE RM oorr ee te 83 CHAPTER TEN DISPLAY SEHN Genereren a tn m 85 O a FUNCION i T T EE 85 10 2 Display the Operation Record coooooooocncccccnonononananoconononananononoccononnnnanonnnccononnnnnnnnanononanannnanons 85 10 35 Help FUNCION atico 85 CHAPTER ELEVEN MEAS
6. Gr ES FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 4 3 4 2 Component Note of the Ladder Diagram There are two ways for carrying out this operation after moving the cursor to the position to be modified the ladder diagram component 1 Click the right key of the mouse after the component is selected select the modified notes M in the springing environment menu ETT knns 2 FAM8 1 ut Cel AOC Copy Ctrlte Paste CtrltV m AI Insert Line Insert A lelet Line Ctr1 lel Modify Notation KOL Basic dictate gt xii Function dictate k ren NE NE rane 1 Fig 4 3 4 2 1 2 Select the edit Alt E Note modification M of the main menu View Window Help lt el Cut Ctrlti Copy CtrltC M I Paste Ctrlty E Modify Hotation CtrltT OL 9 M E Insert Line Insert t Delet Line Ctrl Del O o Fig 4 3 4 2 2 3 Shortcut key Ctrl T Input the notes in the springing dialog box save it by clicking the OK button Bodify Notation EDOS z ps in debug mode Fig 4 3 4 2 3 124 Chapter Four The User Explanation of the Ladder Diagram Software EDIT The notes saved will be displayed the output window under the screen when the component is selected each time refer to the following figure K006 6 0021 0022 K D5 7 K002 0 0023 K lb nn a f axis zero return dec Fig 4 3 4 2 4 4 3 5 Leading out The ladder diagram file sh
7. pO WISI 12S FBR ol GSK CNC EQUIPMENT CO LTD Add No 7 1 Street Luochong North Road Luochongwei Guangzhou 510165 China Tel 86 20 81796410 81797922 Fax 86 20 81993683 All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice Aug 2011 Edition 1 Sep 2011 Printing 1 HTTP WWW GSK COM CN E MAIL SALE1 GSK COM CN uejs s OND Duty seus OINSLZ MSO enue y uomnoeuuo pue uonej ejsu V h GUANGZHOU CHINA Installation and Connection Manual GSK 218MC Series Milling CNC System Gr INSZ b ONS SA cso ooo Doo BS cos Sc EI 12 E VM Em que 00 EISE EST EE dW E el E Fx Pe OBBE id 21313 neg Y ee I 41 Sx F212 ABRA Sl GSK CNC EQUIPMENT CO LTD ae This user manual describes all proceedings concerning the operations of this CNC system in detail as much as possible However it is impractical to give particular descriptions for all unnecessary or unallowable system operations due to the manual text limit product specific applications and other causes Therefore the proceedings not indicated herein should be considered impractical or unallowable 3 This user manual is the property of GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd All rights are reserved It is against the law for any organization or individual to publish or reprint this manual without the express written permission of GSK and the latter reserves the right to ascertain their legal liability Pr
8. List VI Definitions of DATA parameters The magazine capacity is 24 NAME PRESET VALUE 1 The number of the tool in the tool case 2 The number of the tool in the tool case 3 The number of the tool in the tool case 4 The number of the tool in the tool case 5 The number of the tool in the tool case 6 The number of the tool in the tool case 7 The number of the tool in the tool case 8 The number of the tool in the tool case 9 The number of the tool in the tool case 10 The number of the tool in the tool case DO15 15 tool case number 15 The number of the tool in the tool case DO16 16 tool case number 16 The number of the tool in the tool case DO17 17 tool case number 17 The number of the tool in the tool case DO18 18 tool case number 18 The number of the tool in the tool case DO19 19 tool case number 19 The number of the tool in the tool case 231 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System ADDRESS NAME PRESET VALUE DO20 20 tool case number 20 The number of the tool in the tool case DO21 21 tool case number 21 The number of the tool in the tool case D022 22 tool case number 22 The number of the tool in the tool case D023 23 tool case number 23 The number of the tool in the tool case D024 24 tool case number 24 EA number of the tool in the tool case D100 The magazine The magazine capacity D241 The tool number of T It can t be set Cmm
9. c f 5 E a ct O D F 5 E i z L T 5 i et g oO S Y Fig 1 3 1 Installation dimension figure of GSK218MC integration panel 131 Cr PES E E Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System m d 0 A 06 p n E T e a UO i iu 5 O D O o S o e C e id O C lt o n E T 9 sale S cH mu 0 sels 0o E o Sa 0 l Y d 2 18 3 5 NEP QR e i m aiii n E 3 5 i LT We i ine E pde J lt x o o gt m D m O le m l al 20 dem 9 b Fig 1 3 2 Installation dimension figure of GSK2 8MC H editing panel 132 Chapter One e im O amp a po CT OFOG gi gt Oo 0981 J E i 1 4 i AA E Q i Do m p v G o O ET ii o E 0 c 7 ES i a E 0 SS AAN i XN NN SS A T e us bp 2 e mo gt e j
10. Feed hold indicator signal SPL F000 4 Type Output signal Function The PLC is entered into the feed hold state already Output condition The signal can be set to 1 or 0 which is determined by CNC state refer to the Fig 5 1 Automatic operation signal OP F000 7 Type Output signal Function The PLC automatic operation is being performed 5 Output condition This signal can be set to 1 or 0 which is determined by CNC state refer to the Fig 5 1 D Table 5 1 e Cycle start LED Feed hold LED Auto operation LED STL SPL OP iu Cycle start state AE CACA 3 Feed hold state E MEA Auto operation stop state 2 0 _ _ 0o _ _ 5 Reset state E d 0O O Signal address HT 6 5 4 3 2 H 1 H0 5 2 Reset Brief The CNC is reset and entered into the reset state in the following conditions 1 The ESP signal is set to 1 2 Press the RESET key on MDI The reset signal RST outputs to PLC when CNC is reset After the abovementioned conditions are released the reset signal RST is set to O when it outputs the time set by parameter No 203 RST T eset Reset treatment time the setting value of the parameter No 203 Reset treatment Reset The setting value of the signal T reset parameter No 203 Fig 5 2 In the automatic operation the automatic operation stops when CNC is reset and the operation axis 65 S D uonounJ Gr Sx d Installation and Connection Manual
11. ORI Chapter Four Machine Debugging 1 The spindle exact stops when the tapping starts 0 The spindle doesn t exact stop when the tapping starts Parameter number K 0 0 7 PaP O DGN 1 Use the spindle position mode 0 Not use the spindle position mode It is set as 1 during the rigid tapping and it is set as O during the flexibility tapping Appendix The setting method of rigid and flexibility tapping when GSK218MC system with DAPO3 spindle servo drive unit Points of attention 1 During rigid tapping 218MC is with DAPO3 spindle servo drive unit 2 During rigid tapping 218MC must be connected with DAPO3 spindle servo drive unit properly Setting steps A Setting rigid tapping The system adopts the default parameters and only the following parameters can be rewritten 1 2 3 Bit parameter NO 467 is rewritten into 1 servo mode PLC parameter K7 7 is rewritten into 1 the spindle position mode Data parameter The tapping maximum speed set by P257 parameter is set to comply with the maximum speed of the spindle Data parameter The gear 1 speed set by parameter P294 corresponding to tapping is set to comply with the maximum speed of tapping PA4 is set as 5 in DAPO3 parameter speed and position modes During executing the rigid tapping command if the rotation direction of the spindle doesn t comply with the command direction s
12. Remark Clearing the alarm doesn t mean the system isn t in the magazine debugging mode while exiting the magazine debugging mode should be set K010 7 as O Alarm information 1254 The cycle start can t be operated in the magazine debugging mode Reason The alarm occurs when K010 7 1 and press start button in AUTO MDI or DNC mode Trouble shooting Set K0107 as O Alarm information 1255 The tool can t return the origin because it is clamped Reason Z axis returns to the origin when the magazine is in the tool advance position and the spindle tool is clamped Trouble shooting 1 The magazine is in the tool retraction position 2 The spindle tool is released Alarm information 1256 The tool can t return to the tool change position when the tool is clamped Reason Z axis returns to the tool change position when the magazine is in the tool advance position and the spindle tool is clamped Trouble shooting 1 The magazine is in the tool retraction position 2 The spindle tool is released Alarm information 1257 The spindle doesn t position so the tool can t return to the tool change position Reason Z axis returns to the tool change position when the magazine is in the tool advance position and the spindle doesn t position Trouble shooting 1 The magazine is in the tool retraction position 2 The spindle doesn t position Alarm information 1258 The tool can t return to the tool change position due to the magaz
13. S3 It is used for storing the address of EOR operational result The result from the EOR is stored from this address and the data length is consistent with the one of the length For example When the address A and B have the following data which are shown below Address A TAJO T9 AET waesB o T1 T 9 3 T9 T1 T9 TA The operational result of the EOR is shown below o 1 1 0 1 1 0 48 Chapter Six The Compilation Limit of the Ladder Diagram CHAPTER SIX THE COMPILATION LIMIT OF THE LADDER DIAGRAM The program should with the codes END1 and END2 which is regarded as the end symbol of the 1 level and 2 level program and the END1 should be performed before END2 The parallel output is only output instead of multi level output The result output address in the overall basis code output function code can not be set to the following address 1 Counter presetting address DC timer presetting address DT 2 The address systems from KO to K5 are used user can not define it 3 The address systems among the GA63 R510 and R511 are used user can not define it 4 X address and F address on the I O input port The vertical hovering the node point does not connect to the following node and the parallel conducting line is performed the parallel connection to the node network will generate the node or network which can not be performed So the system alarm occurs The start network does not connect directly b
14. gy HA yor A F6 Fig 2 4 2 1 S 3 D 2 O 5 D o o 145 Cr IS Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Connection diagram of GSK218MC with handhold unit in difference type L DB26 male welding Terminal row XS22 Hand unit Pin Signal Signal 1851 HON AVES 15 0V H VH 0V 3 HA er A 4 HA A 2 VCOM COM 1 HBt B 2 HB XX B 9 ESPI VA NC1 22 ESP2 AV NC2 23 HY Y 24 HU 4th 8 H 10 X10 5 HX X 6 HZ Z 25 Hxl Xl 26 H 100 X100 19 LED H LED 10 0V LED FG Fig 2 4 2 2 Connection diagram of GSK218MC with handhold unit in voltage type E DB26 male welding Terminal row 146 XS22 Hand unit Pin Signal Signal 18 5V 3 HA E VCC 1 HB 10 GND OV 21 VCOM COM lt 4 HA Nam A e 2 HB VA B 5 9 ESPI NC1 D 22 ESP2 NC2 93 HY Y O 24 HU 4 8 Hx 10 X10 5 HX x Q 6 HZ Z Oo 95 Hx1 Xl 26 H 100 X100 19 LED LED 10 OV LED FG Fig 2 4 2 3 Chapter Two Connection between Equipments 2 5 Connection of the Spindle Units 2 5 1 List of the Interface Signals The system interface is DB44 pin socket and its pin definitions are shown as below XS23 DB44 female plug
15. tool hold detection or NC tu signal XS41 X003 4 The manipulator Normally open zero position or NC detection signal Bad X005 1 The tool case Normally open OM adiens aeo Bl X005 2 The tool case level Normally open II RN NE XS42 X005 3 The magazine Normally open contact counting normal 0 X942 X005 4 The magazine Normally open contact CW CCW 24 a in position normal 1 XS42 X005 5 The toolpot zero Optional 12 return in position detection XS23 X007 1 The spindle Normally open 21 orientation or NC in position 2 Output PIN SIGNAL SYMBOL INTRODUCTION POSITION INTERFACE NO XS43 YO000 2 The tool releasing clamping XS44 Y 002 5 The manipulator running pL XS44 Y 003 0 The magazine CW rotation 9 Xe 0032 Thetokaseverica C Selecting the magazine switch type The magazine is without the zero return switch Set K010 1 as O The magazine is with the zero return switch Set K010 1 as 1 The magazine zero return switch is normally open type Set K010 2 as O The magazine zero return switch is NC type Set K010 2 as 1 255 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System The magazine zero return switch is NC type Set K010 3 as 0 The tool case vertical detection switch is NC type Set K010 3 as 1 The tool case level detection switch is normally open type Set K010 4 as 0 The tool case level detection switch is NC type Set K010 4 as 1 The magazine coun
16. worktable releasing open contact 222 Appendix Two The Usage Guide ADDRESS SIGNAL INTERFACE DEFINITION CONTACT qu PIN NO O worktable clamping open contact X002 4 XS41 External Normally ov OP X002 5 XS41 5 Detecting the tool Normally X002 6 XS41 18 Detecting the tool Normally 0027 X54 6 Without definition X003 0 XS41 Editing lock Normally perm t mm m X003 1 XS41 Operation lock Normally e moy mm omnet X003 2 X841 The manipulator braking Set by e mtm o o emen X003 3 XS41 22 Detection signal of the Set by ee Repaid genes X003 4 XS41 Detection signal of the Set by CE OH nner 6 ea The magazine rotation NC contact motor overload X003 6 X841 25 he manipulator arm NC contact ee ccs X003 7 XS41 cooling motor NC contact X004 0 X942 External magazine CW Normally p gt rotation open contact X004 1 XS42 14 External magazine CCW Normally BEER P X004 2 X942 2 External toolcase vertical Normally Uer ome to nme mtm moni X004 3 XS42 External toolcase level Normally ee MP 4 ea C X046 Xsa 18 Without defintion EE LEE O eso xa 8 witout ait X005 1 X842 toolcase vertical by X005 2 XS42 toolcase level Set by detection parameters X005 3 X942 22 The magazine counting Normally 223 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System ADDRESS SIGNAL INTERFACE DEFINITION CONTACT PIN NO roma pencontad X005 4 X942
17. 2 Rewriting the following parameters List 4 3 2 iin DEFINITION STATE 0 STATE 1 SETTING EN pe 0 Selecting limit switch of X 2 1 Bii axis S j D 2 O 5 D o o m Selecting limit switch of Y End switches la switch axis axis 159 A ls PES E E Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System K006 3 Selecting limit switch of 2 switches 1 switch the 4 axis B The situation of one limit switch The only switch is used for some switch in positive and negative directions 1 Please strictly connect as the following list List 4 3 3 SIGNAL INTERFACE ADDRESS DEFINITION INTERFACE PIN NO X000 0 XS40 Limit signal of X axis NC contact X000 2 XS40 Limit signal of Y axis NC contact X000 4 XS40 Limit signal of Z axis NC contact X000 6 XS40 Limit signal of the 4 axis NC contact 2 Rewriting the following parameters List 4 3 4 ADDRESS Definition STATE 0 STATE 1 SETTING VALUE axis KOO6 1 Selecting limit switch of Y 2 switches 1 switch 1 axis 1 K006 2 Selecting limit switch of Z 2 switches 1 switch axis K006 3 Selecting limit switch of 2 switches 1 switch 1 the 4 axis List 4 3 5 ADDRESS DEFINITION STATE 0 STATE 1 SETTING A A K007 0 Take the direction opposite O mxeemtumas ff K007 1 Take the direction opposite M Nimvescimaumane S 3 D 2 O 5 D o K007 2 Take the direction opposite a a Take the direction opposite
18. Format display when stopping the most right side timing is placed at the right side the timing of trace stopping is placed at the middle side and the max allowance timing is placed at the right side 101 S D O o D o le Gr ESE ES Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 4 Setting address Move the cursor by the and the signal address that will be traced is inputted inside the it can be traced 15 signals at the same time Any address can be inputted As for the R address the previous 3 positions can be inputted the address before 256 the 4 and 5gh position can be inputted 2 addresses after 255 S 5 S start The signal trace can be performed pressing key after the trace parameter is set correctly T T Stop Stop the signal trace after controlling the ES key DELETE Clear Clear the value under the cursor pressing the key 102 Chapter Two PLC Programming Operation CHAPTER TWO PLC PROGRAMMING OPERATION 2 1 Brief The PLC operations of the GSK218MC serial are completed corresponding interface in the system The overall modification of the ladder diagram should be performed after the limitation higher than the debugging is gained GSK218MC series operations can be performed within two interfaces 1 Enter PLCGRA classification interface pressing PLCGRA twice refer to the fig 2 1 1 The PLCGRA interface consists of basis code function code command table
19. Increment step length 0 01 G261 Skip A G210 Incrementsteplength 0 1 G262 Singleblock G21 1 Incrementlength1 G26 3 Dryrun G212 MPG step length 0 001 1 G264 MS Tlock G213 MPGsteplength0 01 G265 Machinelock G214 MPG step length 0 1 G266 Chapter Three PLC Address Selection stop 1 G21 5 Manualfeedaxis X G270 Program re start G21 6 Manualfeedaxis Y G27 1 Spindle CCW positive G22 0 Manual feed axis Z G272 Spindlestop 1 G22 1 Manual feed axis 4 G273 Spindle CW negative G22 2 Manual feed axis X G280 Spindle negative override 218MC integration Manual feed axis Y euin oA Spindle override cancellatic a o 72S Muntele 76289 Spindle JOG Spindle JOG G228 Spinale orientation 6280 Tunnel selection signal G22 7 Tool magazine zero return G29 1 Lubrication G23 0 Toolclamping release G292 Chip removal_________ G232 _ Tool magazine negative G294 Cycle start G23 6 Toolpivoting Tool infeed G29 5 Feedhold G23 7 Toolreturn tool retraction G29 6 Feed positive override 218MC integration G24 0 Tool changer G29 7 y A O Q Q 3 3 Q Feed override cancellation Overtravel release 218MC integration The signal of G63 bytes are used inside t
20. NO 3 5 can be rewritten oystem parameter numbers 0 03 DIR4 DIRZ DIRY DIRX DIRX 1 X axis feeding direction 0 Taking the direction opposite with X axis feeding one DIRY 1 Y axis feeding direction 0 Taking the direction opposite with Y axis feeding one DIRZ 1 Z axis feeding direction 0 Taking the direction opposite with Z axis feeding one DIR4 1 The 4 axis feeding direction 0 Taking the direction opposite with the 4 axis feeding one After power on if the system displays the alarm of X Y Z axis or the spindle drive unit firstly check whether the drive unit alarms and the drive unit is connected or not If there aren t above situations the level set by the system alarm parameters should not match the alarm level of the drive unit and the bit parameters NO 19 0 NO 19 4 can be rewritten to set the high level valid or the low valid If the customer also uses GSK drive unit the bit parameters NO 19 0 NO 19 4 are set as O After rewriting the parameters press RESET key to cancel the system alarm and for safety the parameter switch of the system should be set as OFF If the drive unit doesn t provide the drive alarm signal the signal can t be connected and the state parameters NO 1920 NO 1974 should be set as 1 meanwhile When the system displays the drive unit alarm the operator should judge the fault on the system side or on the drive unit side The
21. RD NOT code Use the AND STK code is connected with series connection with the front of the circuit after the series connection circuit block is executed AND STK code is the separate code without any address euin oA Refer to the following programming e 7 8 ne ge 100 0 R100 3 Yong Rb x002 1 OR NOT F100 3 OR NOT X011 0 5 O Q Q 3 3 Q F100 3 G003 3 R009 7 RP URI OO 4 AND NOT R100 3 RD G003 3 E RR d AND R009 7 OR STK 1 Block Block AND STK 2 Fig 4 5 1 As for the abovementioned ladder diagram and command table DOR STK indicates parallel connection of the series connection circuit block in the block 2AND STK expresses the series connection between circuit block and 21 CHAPTER FIVE PLC FUNCTION CODE When the basis command code is not easy to compile some operations of the machine tool the function command codes can be simplified it Table 5 1 218MC PLC function command code Serial Serial number number END1 The 1 level sequence ROT Binary rotation control program end na program end CALL Call subprogram DIFU Rising edge detection row 4 CALLU Eri ihe MEM DIFD Trailing edge detection without any condition 05 SP Subprogram EE COMP Binary number comparison Binary number comparison comparison 6 SPE End of subprogram 24 COIN Consistency comparison 7 SET Setting 25 MOWN Data tra
22. RW W LS cS ES vS ujBue ssoJppe oDeJojs Kyoedeo e qe ejep pesy jqe ejep jo sseJppe au o O D et 0 y Q lt 2 amp eyjep indinoandul Jequunu a qe1 ay Jo ssoJppe oeDeJojs au Fig 5 28 1 Controllable condition opecify the operation read or write RW RW 0 Read the data from the data table RW 1 Write the data to the data table Reset RST RST 0 Release the reset RST 1 Reset W 0 Perform the code ACT ACT 0 Do not perform the XMOV code W keeps invariable ACT 1 Perform XMOV code Parameter Length The format specifies the length of the transmission data 1 1 byte length 2 2 bytes length S1 The data capacity storage address of the data table is used to store the data capacity of the data table the occupied byte number should be suitable for the specified length of the Length The valid range of the data is determined by the specified byte length of the Length 1 format 1 byte length from 1 to 512 2 byte length from 1 to 256 that is 256x2 512 bytes which is the capacity of the PLC data table S2 Set the address of the data table head The storage area of the data table byte length x data number of its table The address of the table head should be the value in which is set inside the data table S3 Input output address Set and place the address from the reading when the data is read Set and place the address from writing when the data is write Its byt
23. S 3 D 2 O 5 D o o S 3 D 2 O 5 D o aA mak CUES E 2 5 3 The Connection Circuit of DAPO3 Interfaces GSK218MC is equipped with the interface connection circuit of DAPO3 control circuit DB44 male welding CNC side X523 DB44 female welding Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System DAPO3 spindle 148 FG Fig 2 5 4 1 Pin Signal Signal Pin 15 SCOM VCMD 15 14 SVC VCMD 14 16 AT TF H PA 16 1 A NP PA l 17 Bt y PB 17 2 Br MS PB 2 18 L PZ 18 3 L e PZ 3 7 SDALM ALM 1 Q Spindle CW Y6 0 SFR 9 25 Spindle CCW Y6 1 SRV Zo Sl 24V COM o 24 Spindle enable Y6 2 SON 24 11 Spindle orientation Y6 3 STAO 11 27 Zero speed clamp Y6 5 ZSL PA 2 Speed pos switch Y6 4 E VP 12 28 AXCP PULS 28 33 AXDIR SIGN 33 34 AXDIR SIGN 34 5 S speed arrival X7 2 SAR 5 2 S zero speed check X7 3 ZSP 20 9 S orientataion finish X7 1 COIN 2 44 Speed pos switch finish X7 0 VPO 44 35 COM COM 35 Chapter Two Connection between Equipments 2 6 The System Power Supply Interface The input voltage of the system is 24V And the power supply interface is as below Fig 2 6 1 2 The Control Interface of the External Power Supply The control i
24. Setting K012 7 as O to exit the manipulator debugging mode Alarm information 1264 Switching into the spindle position mode is abnormal Reason During executing M29 code the spindle position mode finish signal isn t received in the time set by 124 Trouble shooting Adjust the time set by T24 or check whether the spindle position mode finish signal is output or not Alarm information 1265 The spindle speed mode switching is abnormal Reason During executing M28 code the spindle speed mode finish signal isn t received in the time set by T28 Trouble shooting Adjust the time set by T28 or check whether the spindle speed mode finish signal is output or not Alarm information 1266 The gear change can t be operated during the spindle rotating Reason Trouble shooting Alarm information 1267 The manipulator can t be operated when the toolcase isn t vertical Reason The manipulator movement is executed when the toolcase is vertical Trouble shooting The toolcase should be executed the vertical movement firstly Alarm information 1268 The manipulator can t be operated because it isn t in the origin Reason The manipulator is operated when it isn t in the origin Trouble shooting Set K12 7 as 1 that is to say the manipulator enters the debugging mode and the manipulator is returned to the origin in JOG mode Alarm information 1269 The manipulator operation stops due to the abnormal Reason Emergency stop is pressed
25. Subprogram Fig 5 5 1 Parameter Subprogram number specify a called subprogram mark number its range is O 99 5 6 SPE End of Subprogram Function Specify the range of the subprogram when the SPE and SP are used together The control will return to the main program of the called subprogram when this function code is performed The subprogram should be compiled after END2 Figure format SPE Fig 5 6 1 24 Chapter Five PLC Function Code For example CALL P33 SWINJOA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q 5 7 SET Replacement Setting Function Set 1 in the specified address ACT SET Add b Address Fig 5 7 1 Format Controllable condition ACT 0 the state of the add b remains invariable ACT 1 the add b is set to 1 Parameter Add b setting component address bit can be treated as the output coil Add Y G R K andA 5 8 RST Resetting Function Set 0 on the specifying place Format ACT Fig 5 8 1 Controllable condition ACT 0 the state of the add b remains invariable ACT 1 add b is set to O 23 euin oA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q Parameter Add b resetting component address can be treated as output coil Add Y G R K and A 5 9 JMPB Mark Number Skip Function JMPB immediately transfers the control to program following with mark number in the ladder diagram programming The characters and limitations are
26. The magazine returns to the retraction position or Z axis returns to the origin Alarm information 1228 The cycle start can t be operated when the magazine is in the tool advance position Reason When the magazine isn t in the tool retraction position start is pressed in AUTO MDI or DNC mode the alarm occurs Trouble shooting The magazine returns to the tool retraction position Alarm information 1229 Set the spindle tool number Reason When the spindle tool number is 0 press clamp release the alarm occurs Trouble shooting The alarm only reminds when the spindle tool number is O the spindle can t be loaded the tool and the alarm can be shielded by rewriting the parameter K011 0 Alarm information 1230 When the spindle tool is released the tool can t be changed Reason The spindle tool is released Y2 0 1 MO6 or M50 code is executed Trouble shooting The spindle tool is in the clamp state Y2 0 0 Alarm information 1231 The tool can t be changed when the magazine isn t in the tool retraction position Reason When the magazine isn t in tool retraction position MO6 or M50 code is executed Trouble shooting The magazine is in the tool retraction position Alarm information 1232 The magazine revolves in position and is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1233 The magazine rotation motor is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting 199 Gr WIE
27. Then the system reminds 1253 caution to operate the magazine debugging mode and pressing the reset key to cancel the alarm 3 Prepare one knife handle to pull the pop rivet 4 In ZERO RETURN mode Z axis zero return is executed 5 In JOG mode press tool advance key the magazine is in the advance position 6 Load the knife handle without the pop rivet on the magazine and adjust it 7 In MPG mode Z axis can be moved upward and downward which should be caution to operate Then the motor rotor or the spindle connecting the motor rotor is directly twisted for one more circle 217 Gr WIZ Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System and the spindle position is adjusted in JOG mode until the key on the spindle key enters the magazine slot About the spindle positioning angle regulation please refer to the manual of the spindle drive unit B Regulating the tool change coordinate position 1 According to the above method after the orientation regulation completes the spindle orientation is executed in the JOG mode and then the tool releasing movement is operated the pop rivet of the knife handle is installed the magazine is still in the tool advance position In MPG mode Z axis can be moved upward or downward to adjust the tool change coordinate position Please make sure the tool is released and record the machine coordinate of Z axis such as 120 000 2 Firstly execute the tool clamping movement a
28. There are three ways for carrying out this operation after moving the cursor to the position to be inserted the ladder diagram line 1 Select the insert after springing out the environment menu by clicking the right key of the mouse 2 Select the Edit Alt E Insertion line I of the main menu 3 Shortcut key Insert 4 3 3 6 Deletion Line There are three ways for carrying out this operation after moving the cursor to the position to be deleted the ladder diagram line 1 Select the insert after springing out the environment menu by clicking the right key of the mouse 2 Select the Edit Alt E Deletion line D of the main menu 3 Shortcut key Ctrl Delete 4 3 3 7 Conversion There are three ways for carrying out this operation after the ladder diagram of the current editing interface is converted into the command list program 1 Select the Edit Alt E Conversion V of the main menu 2 Click once the Ladder diagram conversion button on the editing bar 3 Shortcut key F7 4 3 4 Ladder Diagram Note 4 3 4 1 The Line Note of the Ladder Diagram Click the left key of the mouse twice out of the bus area at the ladder diagram right input the notes in the editing frame A053 0 R080 1 0011 cy 500 MS relay Jona E un annotation Hut 7 5 normal open intermediate relay X axis positive lint intermediate relay Fig 4 3 4 1 1 123 S c 3 D O Lo D Q F O
29. This address area is used for placing the timer preset value This area is nonvolatile register area namely the content inside the register will not lose even if the power of the system is turned off Its definition type 128 addresses The setting value of the DT is only read instead of writing 3 12 Data Table Address D The content inside the memory will not lose even if the power of the system is turned off Its definition type totally 256 addresses Wherein D240 247 are used by the system users can not define by themselves 3 13 Sign Address L It is used to specify signs both skip object and the LBL code in the JMPB code Its range 0 99 3 14 Subprogram Number P It is used to specify the called object subprogram number in the CALL code and the subprogram number in the SP code Its range 0 99 17 CHAPTER FOUR PLC BASIS CODE The design of the sequence program begins from the compiling of the ladder diagram The ladder diagram consists of relay contact and function code The logic relationship in the ladder diagram composes of sequence program There are two methods of the sequence program input one is that the input method uses the mnemonic symbol language The system is not temporarily supported the PLC command code of the RD AND and OR the other one that is used the relay symbol The programming can be compiled using ladder diagram and do not comprehend the PLC code based upon the latter euin oA Ac
30. regardless in the Auto or manual operation it consists of the manual reference position return and program zero return FO speed It is determined by parameter P093 Signal The signal of the rapid traverse rate Rapid FO G025 0 Rapid F25 G025 1 Rapid F50 G025 52 Rapid F100 G025 3 Type Input signal Function It is the rapid traverse override signal The code detection signal of the rapid traverse override G11 0 G11 1 Type Input signal Function lt is the code detection signal of the rapid traverse override Operation The code signal corresponding with the following override Code signal at the rapid traverse rate l Override value RV1 RV2 0 0 100 0 1 50 1 0 25 1 1 0 70 Chapter Six Feedrate Control 6 2 Feedrate Override Brief The override disk can be selected to increase or decrease the programming feedrate by the percentage This character is used for the programming detection For example when the specified feedrate in the program is 100mm min the override is set to 50 the machine is then moves at the speed of 50mm min Signal GSK218MC integration CNC system Feedrate FOV1 X31 3 Feedrate FOV2 X31 4 Feedrate FOV4 X31 5 Feedrate FOV8 X31 6 Feedrate FOV16 X31 7 Type Input signal Function Cutting feedrate override signal Totally 21 gear from 0 to 200 Motion In the Auto operation the specified speed by the cutting feed multiplies the override value selected by this signal wh
31. 1 POS 1 and INC 0 Wherein S3 10 S4 11 W 1 when the objective position is Ain the ACT 1 93 28 S4 9 W 1 when the objective position is B in the ACT 1 93 5 S4 4 and W 0 when the objective position is C in ACT 1 53 3 S4 2 and W 0 when the objective position is D in the ACT 1 5 20 SFT Register Displacement Shifting Function This code can be shifted 1 byte 8 bit based upon the digits specifying by the code parameter each time The 1 overflown from cycle shifting will be added from the negative direction for example the top bit 1 is overflown when shifting to left the lowest bit supplies 1 vise versa Format w LS r D 2 e et 2 CONT TI o 3 D et T o o 2 a ssoeJppe ejep yq ejqe o A Fig 5 20 1 35 SWINJOA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q SWINJOA J A O Q Q 3 gt Q Controllable condition Specify the shifting direction DIR DIR 0 left shift DIR 1 right shift State specifying CONT CONT 0 do not perform the cycle shifting CONT 1 perform the cycle shifting Reset RST Reset shifting output data W 1 is W 0 RST 0 W does not reset RST 1 W resets W 0 Performance condition ACT ACT 0 do not perform the SFT code ACT 1 perform the shifting set ACT to 0 after the code is performed if only 1 bit is moved Parameter S1 Set the shifting data address it composes of one storage area
32. 144 2 4 2 Introduction of Interface Signals oooooooonoccccnonononanananonononannnnnononononannnononoccconannanonos 145 2 9 Conneclon aor the SPINE UNITS opted bo deae te Root tapes e Pee nw mp pb DA nd 147 2 9 1 LISLOF the Inteifaee 9Iignals c eet o RES DEI iR e ade oM a e oe eo Rad 147 2 5 3 The Connection Circuit of DAPO3 Interfaces oooooccccnnconcncconononnnocononannnncconanannnccnnnnnnos 148 2 6 The System Power Supply Interface ooccoocccconccocnoccnococononnononocanonncnonanonacnnncnononenanenos 149 2 The Control Interface of the External Power SUPplY occooccocccocccocicocicocconncocncncnonccononononons 149 CHAPTER THREE THE MACHINE CONTROL I O INTERFACE 150 oc The limenace Sidnal M o n 150 32 the INput TIPO ACCS casco secs rec odii AA RA co oid ue 151 3 2 1 The Circuit Principle of the Input Interface oooconnnnnnonuoonoccccccccnononnnanananananananononoss 151 3 2 2 The Interface Definition of the Input Signals ees 152 2 9 The Outout IIE MACS e UI MeL E abit 154 3 3 1 The Circuit Principle of the Output Interface occonncncnnonuooccccnccocococoninanananananananononoss 154 3 3 2 The Definitions of the Output Signal Interfaces ccooooocoooccnncononananananonononanananonos 155 CHAPTER FOUR MACHINE DEBUGGING oocioccocinccnccnccnconccocconcocconconccnnonncancnnons 157 El ICOM OCICS
33. 3 3 e Users can define the signal significance of the X address of the I O ports based upon the actual cases which can be connected the machine tool and compiled the corresponding ladder diagram Refer to the appendix one GSK218MC CNC system PLC I O address and the configuration and definition of the internal software components for the initial definition of the input address 3 1 2 X Address on the MDI Panel There are 11 types from the addresses X20 X30 of which these addresses are corresponding with the button input on the MDI panel one by one User can not modify its signal definition The buttons on the MDI panel should be firstly responded by CNC and then conveys the X signal to PLC The corresponding relationships are shown below Table 3 1 2 1 PLC PLC FMD oa Rapid 50 aa Zero return X20 3 Rapid100 0 X253 Manual X205 Increment step 0 01 amp X261 MPG X206 Incrementstepo1 amp X262 Skip 21 X210 Manual feed shaft X X270 Spindle negative override Spindle stop X22 1 218MC H V is N axis X28 4 Spindle CW x22 2 Spindle blowing 218MC 037 POSU o ration Spindle negative override 218MC integration X22 3 Spindle orientation orientation ET 0 Spindle override cancellation X22 4 Tool magazine zero return X29 1 218MC integration Spindle positive override 218MC integration x225
34. 5 Tool Tool clampinglreleasing x29 2 2 cancellation 218MC H V X22 7 Tool magazine CCW X29 4 is the channel selection X297 ESP X235 Overtravelrelease X300 Spindle negative override X31 0 Cycle start X23 6 218MC H V is the spindle override SOV1 Feed hold X23 7 Spindle override cancellation X31 1 12 Chapter Three PLC Address po 218 MOCHIN is spindle override SOV2 i 218MC H V is spindle override SOV4 l 218MC H V is the feed override FOV1 Feed override cancellation 218MC H V is the feed override FOV2 X24 3 Feed positive override X31 5 218MC H V is the feed override FOVA Feed override FOV8 X31 6 l Feed override FOV16 Rapid switch X24 7 218MC H V 3 2 PLC Address of the Machine Tool Side Y The Y address of the GSK218MC PLC composes of two types 1 The Y address is assorted with the three I O input terminals namely XS43 XS44 and XS45 2 The Y address is assorted with the indicator on the MDI panel of the system 3 2 1 Y Address on the I O Output Port The addresses 48 addresses are defined as INT8U from YO to Y5 which are distributed on the three I O input terminals for example XS43 XS44 and XS45 Users can define the signal significance of the Y address of the I O ports based upon the actual cases which can be connected the machine tool and compiled the corresponding ladder diagram Refer to the appendix one GSK218MC CNC system PLC I O addre
35. 50 120 When the spindle speed control is performed instead of using the spindle speed override the setting override value is 100 Notice The spindle speed override function in the tapping cycle and thread cutting is disabled Gear shift treatment Although the S code is spindle speed its actual controlled member is spindle motor and therefore the CNC should be affirmed the corresponding relations between spindle motor speed and gear The CNC selects the gear shift based upon the defined speed range of each gear shift in advance as it is directly selected by S code The PLC can be selected the corresponding gear shift using its selection signal GR3 GR2 and GR1 Simultaneously the CNC outputs the spindle motor speed based upon the selected gear shift Specify the SO S99999 and CNC output corresponding codes with the spindle speed in the MDI operation Two or three speed gear shifts GR1 GR2 and GR3 can be set by parameter No 246 248 and then the gear shift selection signal can be output at the same time S D uonounJ When the gear shift selection signal changes the SF signal is simultaneously output The meaning of the gear shift signal is shown below Table 8 1 2 1 the2 gear the3 ger 1 Remak Low Low speed gear Middle Middle intermediate speed gear When the code voltage is 10V spindle speed A at low speed shift Parameter No246 min When the code voltage is 10V spindle speed B at
36. 8 The index worktable releasing V 0i The index workable clamping Woo The magazine CW rotation 003 1 The magazine CCW rotation voos The magazine retraction Wo2 Thspndeentie voos The spindle orentaton C Selecting the magazine switch type The magazine without the zero return switch Setting K010 1 as 0 The magazine with the zero return switch Setting K010 1 as 1 The magazine zero return switch is normally open type Setting K010 2 as O The magazine zero return switch is NC type Setting K010 2 as 1 The magazine tool advance switch is normally open type Setting K010 3 as 0 The magazine tool advance switch is NC type Setting K010 3 as 1 The magazine tool retraction switch is normally open type Setting K010 4 as O The magazine tool retraction switch is NC type Setting K010 4 as 1 213 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System The magazine counting switch is normally open type Setting K010 5 as O The magazine counting switch is NC type Setting K010 5 as 1 For example The magazine isn t with the zero return switch each detection switch is the normally open type the parameter should be set as K010 120 K010 2 0 K010 3 0 K010 4 0 K010 5 0 D Setting the magazine capacity Input the magazine capacity in DATA100 and CTR100 Points for attention 1 The magazine capacity is the number of toolcase in the magazine 2 The setting value of DAT
37. END2 when the new file is set up so that the user can consecutively operate this ladder diagram file The command table remains null if it is converted after opening the file User can copy or cut the ladder diagram from the normal file it can not exceeds 100 rows otherwise only the previous 100 rows can be performed pasting to other file then copy the function without modification and then set up a new file For safety s sake after the ladder diagram is compiled the current file may automatically stored when another file is opened the ladder diagram syntactic may be detected before storing of which it may give up if the incorrect syntax is found 5 The file head includes the basis information of the file such as the line number and step number wherein the step information occurs as long as it is converted otherwise it always keeps the opening information User can delete the unopened and unoperated ladder diagram file this operation is the irreversible operation so user should be careful The system may stop the renewal of the ladder diagram network after the user open the unoperated ladder diagram in order to avoid the misguidance The operating ladder diagram can only be stored and copied so that user can copy this information to others ladder diagram files It is better to stop the operation before compiling the current ladder diagram When the cursor stops at the background compiling file user can open the Info information to
38. FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Alarm information 1234 The program stops running when the magazine is in the tool advance position Reason The alarm occurs when the program is running while the magazine isn t in the tool retraction position Trouble shooting The magazine should return to the tool retraction position before executing the program Alarm information 1235 The magazine moves in position and is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1236 The magazine zero return is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1237 The magazine origin position is missed so zero return should be operated again Reason When the magazine returns zero point the abnormal occurs zero return stops and the alarm occurs Trouble shooting The magazine returns zero point again About the detailed operation please refer to Chapter II The usage method and maintenance of GSK218MC CNC system with the turret magazine Alarm information 1238 The tool advance in position is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1239 The tool retraction in position is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1240 The magazine is abnormal zero return should be operated Reason 1 When the magazine stops for the time set by T102 the magazine counting switch X3 5 is det
39. Feedhod J JA 9 J O GO2387 Feed override 218MC all in one machine GO2480 Feed override cancellation 1 GO24f S D uonounJ 9 Gr ESE ES Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Feed override 218MC all in one machine GO2482 Rapid switch GO24H7 ATA J J GO02580 Rapid 25 ZJ dd GO0250 Rapid 50 1 GO252 Rapid 100 G025 3 Increment step length 0 001 G026 0 Increment step length 0 01 HT Increment step length 0 01 GO02682 Increment step length14 GOZAR MPG step length 0 001 GHA MPG step length 0 01 0 HS MPG step length 0 1 oo HE Manual feed axis X J lU Z GO2THO Manulfeedaxs Z 1 GOZAR Manual feed axis 4 GO2PT S Eo EEUU un 3 3 3 i ml Spindle orientation 30 3 3 3 S GO2980 Tool magazine zero retum O Z o O GO2981 E Toolclampingireleasing 1 1 1 GO262 8 Tool magazine positive 1 O GO2988 ea Tool magazine negative o amp GO2984 Toolmagazinepivoting J GO2985 Toomagazineretracion o Z 1 o GO2986 Tool changer O GO29087 _Overtravel rele
40. K003 S joleljojele la Sjoleljojele la S jolejojeleo a S jolejojele a S olejojelo a S jolejolelo Slolerjoljelo e S joleloljeolo e xo o0 o 0 0 90 0 90 O9 Kms o o o o 1 o 1 Xs o o o o o o o o K011 9 9 9 9 S O O P S O O O S O O O 9 9 9 9 S SO Oj r 9 9 9 9 S S Oj r DATA E 11 58 43 PATH 1 Fig 3 1 3 1 Nonvolatile Hold Relay Press the KPAR soft key in the Fig 3 1 then enter the checking and setting interfaces of the nonvolatile replay refer to the Fig 3 1 1 S D E O D um y et O CA u Xi o 0o 0 0 0 i 90 i mo o o o o o o o 1 Xs o o o o o o o o Slolelo e ololelo e S joleleo a Sljoleloe a S jolelo a Sljoleljo blojeje la Slole lo e K 5 Kms o 1 o o o 1 o 1 Xs o o o o o o o o Kow o o o o o o 0 o K011 Sljolelo e o cojoleloleljso Sjolelo ejeo Sjolele e jao Sjoleloe e jeo Sjolelo ele Sjoljelo eljeo Sljoleo o e lo 11 56 43 PATH 1 DATA Fig 3 1 1 111 Gr WEI Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System The content and operation of the nonvolatile replay interface RUN Ladder diagram operation state ADDR Nonvolatile relay address BitO Bit7 Bit number state of the nonvolatile replay address 1 This address remains the state before power off after the power is turned off 0 This address resets on default state after the power is turned off Input
41. K010 3 K010 4 K010 5 K010 6 K010 7 K011 0 K011 1 and K011 2 are set to invalid 3 When K001 0 1 the magazine is used and valid K008 2 setting is invalid 4 When K008 2 0 the tool clamping releasing device isn t used K008 1 setting is invalid 5 Points of attention for setting K006 0 When two limit switches of X axis are installed the positive limit switch is connected with X0 0 the negative with X0 1 K006 0 is set as 0 and becomes valid When one limit switch of X axis is installed which must be connected with X0 0 and K006 0 is set to 1 and becomes valid And the setting of K006 1 of Y axis K006 2 of Z axis K006 3 of the 4 axis are same as that of X axis 6 When K005 2 1 all the alarm interlock is released and the system enters the debugging mode which is only used during the system testing When the system is normally used the parameter should be set as 0 otherwise the accident may happen 7 About the relative parameters K010 1 K010 2 K010 3 K010 4 K010 5 K010 6 K010 7 K011 0 K011 1 and K011 2 with the magazine please refer to part III the usage and maintenance of the magazine 191 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 8 When K004 0 1 whether the spindle uses l O point control K008 4 whether the spindle is with the gear change device is set to invalid that is to say the spindle is without the gear change device 9 When K015 0 0 the operation panel of GSK21
42. PLC Interface Display 1 2 4 PLCDGN Interface Enter PLCGRA interface pressing the HPLCGRA soft key it also can be set under the PLC interface defining the bit parameter NO 262621 and press the programmable key to shift the screen entering the PLCGRA interface Refer to the Fig 1 2 4 1 ADDR Bit7 Bit6 Bits Bit4 Bits Bit Bitl Bite EN E 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DATA 11 45 22 PATH 1 cam INFO EPLCGRA EPLCPAR MN EPLCTRA Fig 1 2 4 1 The content and operation of the PLCDGN interface RUN Operation state of the ladder diagram ADDR Address of diagnosis number Bit0 Bit7 The bit number state of the diagnosis address 1 with signal breakover 0 without the signal breakover Input Display the input data MDI mode Current working method The searching and positioning can be performed by the pageup pagedown and other direction keys the corresponding diagnosis number then can be viewed and modified Generally only the searching operation can be performed in the interface the I O terminal of the PLC enters signal debugging mode only the user gain the limit setting that KO 1 is set to 1 in this case user can modify the X and Y signals S D O o D um o O 99 Gr WEI Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 1 2 5 PLCTRA Interface PLCTRA interface compose
43. Return Return to the previous menu gt Enter to the next page The set value can be downloaded to the CNC operation pressing the lt Save gt key after modifying TMR downloading successful displays after the save is performed the system displays downloading fail when the save is incorrect the illegal downloading parameter displays without downloading conditions Note It only can be saved and operated by pressing the Save key after modifying The search and positioning can be performed by the pageup pagedown and four direction keys on the panel checking and modifying of the data list address can be performed 3 4 Counter Press the CTR soft key in the Fig 3 1 then enter the checking and setting interface of the counter refer to the Fig 3 4 1 Mo AXR cuRT ser ams OO coso 00000 STANDBY YU A JE JUVES 0005 oaae AY f Ed Y f fj A Gj fi f oaos vee coo00 11 29 02 PATH 1 JY AG AR JV DO 20 Jy 2 AEG 2000 2 2000 200 AVY 2008 009 210 DATA dj KPAR TMR DATA ELEM RETURN Fig 3 4 1 The content and operation of the counter RUN The operation state of the ladder diagram NO Serial number of the counter Do not change ADDR Counter address Do not change CURT Current value of the counter Do not change SET Counter setting value it can be changed after the K000 0 PLC parameter allows modification is s
44. S and T codes may be performed simultaneously in a block The CNC can be performed next block after affirming the end signal FIN is set to 1 The basic processing of the spindle S code analog value Table 7 2 1 PEOR Outputsignal The signal Responce Function os aha F add al Strobe completion of ge ae address eigna the shift 9 PEU T s GRAR SRESP FIN G000 amp 0 nction F034 0 2 F007 2 GO02 4 G063 1 rein The S code miscellaneous function explanations are shown below 1 It is supposed that the SXXXX is specified in program The state of F34 0 2 is determined by parameter P246 248 and PLC can be performed the processing of the gear step change by this signal for example the parameter P246 is set to 1000 and S500 executes 2 If the non M S and T codes such as the movement and dwell are specified with the miscellaneous function at the same time the miscellaneous function is then simultaneously performed 3 When the S500 is performed the F address signal F34 0 and the strobe signal FOO7 2 are set to 1 simultaneously ensuring the PLC sets the response signal SRESP G063 1 to O 4 The PLC is set the gear shift signal GRAR G002 4 is set to 1 when the gear shift is completed 5 PLC is set the end signal SFIN GO00 4 and FIN GOO0 0 to 1 when the S code miscellaneous function is performed If these code miscellaneous functions namely M S and T are performed simultaneously the end signal FIN GOO
45. THE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION 129 1 1 Composition of the SYSTEM ii IA 129 1 2 The System Installation and Connection oocccoccccocnconnncocncccncnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnonnnnnnnncnnnnoncnnonnnonos 129 1 3 CNC System Installation Dimension Figure oocccocncocncoccccocncocnnocnconcnoncnnonnnonnnnnnnoncnnnnnnnnns 131 LA Tie AdaltionalPariel FIgUle ssl did Opa be amete io aieea 136 CHAPTER TWO CONNECTION BETWEEN EQUIPMENTS ne 137 2 1 Connection Diagram of the External SySteM oc occccccccocncconococncccncnnnnnnnnconnonannnnnncnnncnncnnns 137 2 1 1 The Layout of Interface Position oooooooconcccconononanannnonononanananonococnnnnnnnnononccconnannnnnnns 137 2 4 2 The Gonnectllon Dia IM A letta du gus leet ean es 138 2 2 Connection between the System and the Drive Unit ccoocccccnccocncocnconcccocnconnccaninononos 139 2 2 1 HE System internace FUE iii 139 222 Me Interface Signal Listas 140 2 2 9 Iii oddcllonobeidhale usais aida it 140 2 2 4 The Cable Connection DiagraM oooooocnnccccnnnononanunoconononanannnnnonononnnnnnnnnocnonnnnnnonnnnncconnnannnanons 142 2 9 39232 Standard Series Interfaces rc oet e vvea ias 144 2 4 Connection between MPG and Handhold Unlit ooccocccoccconconncocccocconccocncocncococanononcnos 144 2 4 1 Interface Signal Diagram ccccnnnnococnccoconononananonocononannnnnononoconnnnnnnnnnocoononnnnnnnnnnccnnnnnnnnn cons
46. TRENT IN46 13 IN15 13 IN31 XS43 output 1 DB25 female plug 4544 output 2 DB25 female plug X545 output 3 DB25 female plug D032 200 gt 141 DOOI bois 14 D017 gt t poga 14 D033 a LEE 3 COM D019 3 coy 15 D035 oa 116 24 4 24y 19 24 ee 24 o i6 DOS 5 D021 n 5 D037 18 D006 p023 19 D022 noso 18 D038 6 D007 6 19 6 19 19 COM J COM 7 424V COM T 24V T 24V a 20 24V 8 poog 20 24V g D024 g DUO 7 a Toro 121 D009 9 D026 t D029 9 0042 5 54 o col S Re l0 C y 10 COM 2 23 24V a 24V roy 29 MY lil 24V 11 24V 24 11 24 24 D012 D029 D028 D044 12 D013 12 25 D030 12 D045 95 D046 ooon Loe 13 D031 13 D047 Fig 3 1 S 3 D 2 O D o 5 150 Among them XS40 XS41 and X842 are input interfaces DB25 pins and XS43 XS44 and XS45 are output interface DB25 hole Chapter Three The Machine Control I O Interface 3 2 The Input Interfaces 3 2 1 The Circuit Principle of the Input Interface DC input signals from machine to CNC come from the buttons of the machine side the limit switch and the contacts of the relay etc a The contacts of the machine side should satisfy the following conditions Contact capacity DC30V above 16mA The leakage current of contacts during the open circuit below 1mA voltage 26 4V The voltage drop of contacts during the closed circuit below 2V current 8 5mA including the voltage drop of the cable b The return circuit of the si
47. Type Output signal Function These signals are shown that the miscellaneous function has been specified actually The corresponding table between miscellaneous function and output signal in the program code are shown below Table 7 3 2 Output signal MOO DMOO DMO1 Output condition The M encoding signal is set to 1 when the following conditions are described e Specify the corresponding miscellaneous function and any specified move command and dwell code is completed at the same block However when the end signal of the miscellaneous function returns before the move code and dwell code these signals are then not outputted The M encoding signal bit is O when the following conditions are performed FIN signal bit is 1 e Whenit is reset The end signal of M code miscellaneous function MFIN G000721 Response signal of M code miscellaneous function MRESP lt G063 0 gt Type Input signal Function It means that the M code miscellaneous function is completed Operation Refer to the M code miscellaneous function in Section 7 1 for the treatment and process in the control unit The strobe signal of S code miscellaneous function TF F007 2 Type Output signal Function These signals are shown that the spindle speed function has been specified actually Output condition Refer to the S code miscellaneous function in Section 7 2 for the output condition and performance process The end signal
48. USER key indicator Y17 4 indicator The 4 axis zero return y43 656 N axis key indicator YAT 5 indicator DEF indicator Y13 7 218MC integration Y17 7 Skip indicator Y14 0 X key indicator Y18 0 Single step indicator Y14 1 Y key indicator Y18 1 Dry run indicator Y14 2 Z key indicator Y18 2 M S T lock indicator Y14 3 4TH key indicator Y18 3 Machine tool lock v4 USER2 key indicator Y18 4 indicator MICE toot jgnung Y 14 5 N axis key indicator Y18 5 indicator Lubrication indicator Y14 6 Tunnel selection key indicator Y18 6 Cooling indicator Y14 7 JOG key indicator Y18 7 Chip removal indicator Overtravel end key indicator The indicator of feed override cancellation Y15 1 Feed dwell key indicator Y19 1 ke Rapid switch indicator Cycle start key indicator Y19 2 1 100 key indicator Y156 3 3 J 3 3 PLC CNC Address G D a O e y 3 3 e The addresses from GO to G63 its definition type INT8U totally 64 bytes The operation panel key signal is shown below Table 3 3 1 Feed negative override Editmode 6200 tame tegration S242 Auto mode G20 1 Rapid switch G24 7 MDI mode G202 RapidFo G250 Zeroreturn mode G203 Rapid25 G251 Singlestep mode G204 Rapid 50 G252 Manud mode G20 Rapid100 G253 MPG mode G2096 Increment step length 0 001 G26 0 DNCmode G207
49. When the program restart signal is set to 1 for searching the sequence number of the restart block the CRT screen shifts to the program restart screen When the program restart signal is set to 0 and the automatic operation is enabled the machine tool moves to the machining restart point with the dry run speed in turn based upon the setting of the axis sequence The machining restarts after the machine tool moves to the restart point The signal in the program restart SRNMV lt F002 4 gt Type Output signal Function It means that the program is being started Output condition This signal becomes 1 When the G21 6 is set to 1 in the Auto state the program restart signal is set to 1 When this signal becomes 0 Program restart sequence end all of the controllable axis from the machine are moved to the restart point S D uonounJ Signal address 7 6 5 4 3 2 F 0 en se j j jsw j 69 S D uonounJ Gr ESE ES Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System CHAPTER SIX FEEDRATE CONTROL 6 1 Rapid Traverse Rate Brief 4 gear override FO 25 50 and 100 can be used for the rapid traverse rate Rapid traverse override 50 os Rapid traverse rate Rapid traverse rate 10m min om min Fig 6 1 Feedrate The actual move speed is gained from which the setting value of the parameter P088 092 multiples the override value
50. address storing the current position S3 Specify the address or code value storing the objective position For example store the address of the T code outputting from the CNC S4 The calculation outputs to address compute the steps to be rotated of the rotary which reaches to the objective position or the previous position Always check whether the ACT is 1 when using the calculation result Output W Rotation direction output It outputs to the W by the short circuit rotation direction its direction is positive FOR when W 0 it is the negative direction REV when W 1 The definitions of the FOR and REV are shown below the increase direction of the position number of the revolving table is positive FOR it is the negative direction in the decrease state The address of W can be selected freely however if the W results should be used always check the condition of the ACT 1 34 Chapter Five PLC Function Code For example One revolving table is shown below Current position 10 Position A Position C 8 7 Position B Fig 5 19 2 LS cS Q0 C2 uonisod ejqe BulAjoney sseJppe uoljisod uano jndjno ynsa uone noje2 O D o 2 t m O 23 oO O o O 23 Dd oa o o o Fig 5 19 3 The short path rotation is performed and the numbers of the previous position of the objective one is then calculated Current position number S271 revolving index position number S1 12 CNO 1 DIR
51. and maintenance of GSK218MC CNC system with the turret magazine Alarm information 1219 The spindle can t revolve in the magazine tool advance position Reason The spindle revolution is operated when the magazine doesn t retract in position Trouble shooting The magazine returns to the tool retraction position detect whether the magazine is in the tool retraction position by checking the state of X5 2 197 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Alarm information 1220 The spindle tool clamping is detected abnormal Reason When the tool is clamped Y0 2 0 in the time set by T010 the tool clamping detection switch X2 6 is OFF Trouble shooting 1 Detect whether the magazine clamping detection switch is normal or not 2 Detect whether YO 2 is output or not 3 Adjust the time of T010 again Alarm information 1221 The spindle tool releasing is detected abnormal Reason When the tool is released Y0 2 1 in the time set by T009 the magazine release detection switch X2 5 is OFF Trouble shooting 1 Detect the magazine releasing detection switch is normal or not 2 Detect whether YO 2 is output or not 3 Adjust the time of T009 again Alarm information 1222 The spindle unit temperature is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1223 The spindle speed is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1224 The spindle
52. by the numbers from 0 to 127 Output W Coil output W 1 when it reaches to the presetting value Note 1 The system may automatically check its range of the sequence number of the timer it may alarm if the sequence is repeated or exceeded its range Note 2 The current value of the timer may automatically reset after the ladder diagram is converted and downloaded Reset the counter by the pulse signal before counting for ensuring the reliable of the counter 5 15 DEC Binary Decoding Function DEC can be decoded for the binary system code data one of the consecutive data of the specified 8 bit 1 type or 16 bit 2 types is same as the code data The corresponding output data bit is 1 the output data is O without any same number This code is used for the data decode of M or T function Format S2 S3 Length Stcode decode decode Format data specifying address specifying result number address Fig 5 15 1 30 Chapter Five PLC Function Code Controllable condition ACT 0 Reset all of the output bits ACT 1 Perform the data decode the treatment result is set at the output data address Parameter Length Set the dimension of the code data at the 1 bit data of the parameter 0001 The code data is binary system code data of one byte 0002 The code data is binary system code data of two bytes S1 Code data address Supply an address of the storage code data S2 Decoding specifying number Specify
53. coded wheel feedback cable and the motor strong current cable of AC servo feed unit e Confirm the type of the analog voltage code received by the spindle e Confirm all the earth wires are connected properly e Confirm the usefulness of the emergency stop button and the emergency stop return circuit Make sure that the power supply of the drive device and that of the spindle drive device are OFF after pressing the emergency stop button or disconnecting the emergency return circuit e Confirm the voltage of each circuit power supply is correct and the polar is connected right S 3 D 2 O 5 D o o e Confirm the power supply specification in each circuit is correct e Confirm each transformer specification and in out direction in the circuit is correct e Confirm the power supply in out circuit direction of each breaker is correct 157 S C 3 D 2 O D o Cr IS Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 4 2 System Power on O Press the emergency stop button and make sure all the air switches are OFF O Switch on the air switch of the main power supply in the cabinet e Connect the air switch controlling DC24V or the fuse and check whether DC24V power supply is normal or not e Check whether the power supply of the other parts is normal or not e Electrify GSK218MC CNC device 4 3 Emergency Stop and Limit The system is with the software limit function For safety th
54. directly twist the motor rotor or the spindle connecting the motor rotor for one more circle it is suggested that the user directly twist for the convenient operation 5 Adopt the above method to twist the motor for one more circle and adjust gradually the motor 218 Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram spindle rotor can position on the positioning point After the operation the absolute position of the E 0 rotor can be observed or other numerical value is displayed on the monitoring window The value is recorded in the parameter PA58 and saved that is the position For example If E 2183 parameter PA58 is displayed on the monitor window the numerical value 213 is input into the 4 The right method of handling the emergency stop power off resetting and alarm during the magazine running 1 In MDI mode the tool change is commanded or it is operated in Auto mode When the magazine is in the advance limit position the spindle comes downward the tool hold position After clamping the tool if the emergency stop power off alarm or resetting occurs when the magazine is going to retract press tool retraction on the system to exit the magazine in JOG mode then the tool takes off the current magazine chuck the machine can be used Points for attention If the spindle is released Z axis is lifted and the magazine is exited the magazine corresponding to the current spindle is loaded the tool the
55. during the manipulator running and the manipulator operation stops by resetting due to the abnormal Trouble shooting Set K10 7 as 1 that is to say the magazine enters the debugging mode and the manipulator is returned to the origin in JOG mode Alarm information 1270 The manipulator tool hold is detected abnormal Reason The manipulator is executed the tool hold operation but it can t reach the tool hold position in the time set by T110 Or the manipulator is fallen downward for rotating 180 but it can t reach the tool hold position in the time set by T111 Trouble shooting Check whether the output of Y2 5 is normal or not Check whether the input of X3 3 is normal or not Alarm information 1271 The manipulator can t be operated because the spindle doesn t orientate Reason The manipulator operation is executed before the spindle orientating 245 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Trouble shooting The spindle orientation should be executed firstly Alarm information 1272 The manipulator can t be operated when the spindle tool isn t released Reason When the spindle doesn t release the tool the manipulator is fallen downward for rotating 180 Trouble shooting Check whether the output of YO 2 is normal or not check whether the input of X2 5 is normal or not Alarm information 1273 The manipulator can t be operated when the spindle tool isn t clamped Reason When the spindle doe
56. for measuring the dimensions of a workpiece The coordinate values when the skip signal is turned on can be used in a custom macro because they are stored in the custom macro system variable 5016 5019 as follows 5016 X axis position of EOB 5017 Y axis position of EOB 5018 Z axis position of EOB 5019 4 axis position of EOB Signal Special signal SKIPP lt G001 1 gt Type Input signal Function This signal completes the skip cutting Namely the position of skip signal turns into 1 which is stored in the user macro variable simultaneously the move code of the block is ended Operation The controllable equipments are shown in the following when the skip signal turns into gh iS e When the block consists of the skip machining code G31 the current position of the code axis when the control equipment is read and stored the signal that it is set to 1 The control equipment stops the move of the axis and then clear the remaindering move distance of this block code axis eo The state of the skip signal is monitored instead of its rising edge In this case if the skip signal is still 1 it is regarded as the skip condition is met immediately when next skip cutting is commanded Note The requirement of the skip signal width is at least 10ms Signal address 7 6 5 H4 3 2 H1 0 somo cc 86 Chapter Twelve Panel Lock Setting CHAPTER TWELVE PANEL LOCK SETTING Signal Program edit locking signal LEDT G
57. isn t any code of the tool number in the tool list or the code of the tool 201 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System number is repeated Reason There isn t any tool number specified by T code in the tool list DOO1 D099 or the tool number specified by T code is repeated Trouble shooting Rewrite the tool number value of the tool list Alarm information 1246 The tool advance can t be operated because the magazine isn t in the tool change position Reason Z axis isn t in the tool change position but the tool advance in the magazine is operated Trouble shooting After executing G91 G30 and ZO codes Z axis returns to the position of tool change Alarm information 1247 The spindle doesn t position the tool advance in the magazine can t be operated Reason The spindle doesn t position but the tool advance in the magazine is operated Trouble shooting The spindle positioning is executed Alarm information 1248 The tool retraction in the magazine can t be operated in the tool releasing state Reason The spindle tool is released but the tool retraction is operated Trouble shooting The tool retraction is operated after clamping the spindle tool Alarm information 1249 The tool advance can t be operated because the spindle is with tools Reason The tool advance in the magazine is executed when Z axis is in the origin and the spindle is with tools D245 isn t 0 Trouble shooting Unload t
58. machine control cabinet temperature is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1209 The machine bed temperature is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1210 The machine vibration frequency is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1211 The pressure oil temperature is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1212 The oil pressure is too low Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1213 The machine is not ready Reason User defined Trouble shooting 196 Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram Alarm information 1214 The spindle revolution can t be operated due to the spindle gear abnormal Reason The spindle gear abnormal is detected during the revolution code of the spindle is executed Trouble shooting When the spindle is in gear I Y3 4 1 in the time set by T0021 if the gear I in position detection switch X4 1 is OFF adjust the time of T0021 or check whether X4 1 is ON or not When the spindle is in gear II Y3 5 1 in the time set by T0022 if the gear II in position detection switch X4 2 is OFF adjust the time of T0022 or check whether X4 2 is ON or not When the spindle is in gear III Y3 671 in the time set by T0023 if the gear III in position detection switch X4 3 is OFF adjust the time of T0023 or check whether X4 3 is ON o
59. modify the compiling file background including the ladder diagram version number suitable machine and ladder diagram maintainer by the modification key S D O D um o le 96 Chapter One PLC Interface Display 1 2 2 PLCGRA Interface Enter PLCGRA interface pressing the HPLCGRA soft key it also can be set under the PLC interface defining the bit parameter NO 262621 and press the programmable key to shift the screen entering the PLCGRA interface Refer to the Fig 1 2 2 1 PLCGRA ladder 1 KOOS e FABS 2 ABB 7 Kan 5 Ban KOOS e Fans 1 Ra887 6 Baa e Kaas e Fans 1 Ra87 7 ABBB 4 KaB5 e Fags 1 Ra88 Baa 6 Kaas e Fans 1 ABB ABBB 1 Raso 1 Kags e Fans 1 XBaB e Baa 3 Ra88 e Kags e Fans 1 DATA S adreese HERD ER Hp PATH 1 EPLCPAR PLCDGN A Fig 1 2 2 1 The content and operation of the PLCGRA interface PLCGRA ladder01 Operate the current ladder diagram name 001 1193 It means that the cursor specified place is at the ladder diagram Run Ladder diagram operation state The operation stage of the ladder diagram includes RUN STOP and DEBUG Figure area Ladder diagram program Input Display the input data The input data can be enquired pressing the on the panel MEA The note of cursor positioning node MDI mode Current working method The ladder diagram can be modified only in the MDI mode The searching and positioning ca
60. normally closed contact Insert the horizontal breakover line Insert the vertical breakover line place at the lower right corner of the cursor Delete single cell or horizontal breakover line T Delete the vertical breakover line at the lower right corner of the component 119 Gr ES FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Insert the input coil a Insert the output coil reverse 1 Function code button There are two methods in the Edit function code 1 Spring the drawing menu pressing the mini arrow at the right once and then select the function codes e e 4 H CTE TME 001 4 KDO5 ROT K005 0 3 lt 006 7 ENIS 0002 Mas as G001 0 FOO1 1 e Ros7 5 xnnn n Koos M 0004 I HM SP R S7 6 XD00 2 Koos FE 0005 po AAA EA RO087 7 lt 000 4 KODS 0006 pp RO0SS 0 000 6 KODS ooo HE 000 0 000 1 ROS8 0008 E K006 0 K006 0 0009 000 2 000 3 ROSE lt 0010 H 0011 3 000 4 000 5 Ross o 0012 H 0013 O xD00 6 x000 7 ROS8 O 001 4 O K006 3 K006 3 N 0015 o 6020 0 GO20 4 G020 O E E sd Fig 4 3 1 2 1 2 Or click the button icon set the function code in the sprung function code selection dialog EE select Function Dictate in left list box or input in the right edit box Fig 4 3 1 2 2 120 Chapter Four The User Explanation of the Ladder Diagram Software EDIT 4 3 2 The Selection of the Figure In the editing view of the ladder diagram the black re
61. of GSK s products VII VIII Contents CONTENTS VOLUME L PROGRAMMING 3 otro eet pcena tocar da 1 CHAPTER ONE THE COMPILATION SCHEDULE OF SEQUENCE PROGRAMMING 3 12 GSKZIOMG Senes PLO SpeGIHCatlOD isror senen eo ehe d et tma A 3 1 2 The Concept of the Sequence Programming oooooccccccnnnononanninononanannnnnonononononananononocononanonanoss 3 1 3 Distribution Interface Step one nenne nennen nen nnne nenne nennen 4 1 4 Ladder Diagram Programming Step two sse enne 4 1 5 Sequence Programming Debugging Step 3 ccccnnnooonnnnccononononanananocononanaannnnocononana nacos 4 CHAPTER TWO SEQUENCE PROGRAMMING sssseen IH nennen nnne nnns 5 2 1 Performance Process of Sequence Programming sss 5 22 he Penormance Orne Cy Cle uu ce o ono ER e E a aee e Ee ARE 6 2 3 The Priority Sequence of the Performance the 1st Level the 2nd level 6 2 4 Sequence Programming Structure asasinen a 7 2 5 The Treatment of the Input output Signal oooooooocccccccnononnanaannnononananananonocononnnnananononons 8 A T S 10 CHAPTER THREE PECADORES A e 11 9 1 Machine PEC address Messina ico iii bine A 11 3 2 PLC Address of the Machine Tool Side Y sess 13 Do T Eo TOC Ade SS 9 s aceite ieu oa 14 Sd ONG PEC Add eS ratas ninia 15 2 5 Internal Replay Address Is oun suid dl 15 3 6 Nonvolatile Relay Addres
62. of GSK218MC CNC System decelerates then stops The CNC is reset during performing the M S T function the MF SF and TF signals are set to O within 16ms RST F001 1 Type Output signal Function PLC and CNC is already reset this signal is used for treating the PLC reset Output condition This signal is set to 1 based upon the following conditions 1 ESP signal is set to 1 2 Press the lt RESET gt key on MDI This signal is set to O in the following case After the abovementioned conditions are released and then the CNC is reset The reset signal output time set by parameter No 203 has been ended Signal address 7 6 5 4 3 2 H1 0 5 3 Program test Brief The automatic operation detection should be firstly performed before machining which is tested whether the generated program is correct When the machine does not operate the detection is performed by the change viewing the position display or the actual operation machine tool 5 3 1 Machine Tool Lock Brief Do not move the change of the machine tool monitoring position display When all axes of the machine tool lock signal MMLK is set to 1 stop to output pulse to the servo motor during manual or Auto operation but the code distribution is still performed and the absolute and relative coordinates are also renovated So the operator can check whether the code compilation is correct viewing the change of the monitor position The machine tool lock detectio
63. of S code miscellaneous function SFIN lt G000 4 gt The response signal of S code miscellaneous function SRESP lt G063 1 gt Type Input signal Function It means that the S code miscellaneous function is completed Operation Refer to the S code miscellaneous function in the Section 7 2 for the treatment and 75 S D uonounJ S D uonounJ Gr Miser Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System performance process of the unit Tool function strobe signal BF F007 3 Type Output signal Function These signals are shown that the tool function has been specified actually Output condition Refer to the T code miscellaneous function in Section 7 3 for the output condition and performance process Tool function end signal TFIN lt GO000 5 gt Type Input signal Function It means that T code miscellaneous function is completed Operation Refer to the T code miscellaneous function in Section 7 3 for the treatment and performance of the control unit Miscellaneous function end signal FIN G000 0 Type Input signal Function This signal shows the end of the M S and T code miscellaneous functions Operation When this signal is 1 refer to the explanations in Section 7 1 7 2 and 7 3 for the operation and treatment of the control unit Caution All of these functions abovementioned are shared with one end signal FIN G00070 this signal should be set
64. of two setting and trace Enter the PLCTRA setting interface by pressing the HIPLCTRA soft key under the screen Refer to the figure 1 2 5 1 SAMPLING MODE RESOLUTION TIME STOP CONDITION TRIGGER ADDRESS MODE SAMPLING CONDITION TRIGGER ADDRESS MODE DATA 11 48 20 Ej N r PATH 1 mcm Trace RETURN Fig 1 2 5 1 The content and operation of the PLCTRA setting interface 1 Mode Periodic cycle periodic sampling for each time Signal change sampling for the change of current signal TIME CYCLE SIGNAL TRANSITION 8 8ms 1000ms 81920 1000ms 8192Bms NONE BUFFER FULL TRIGGER unknown RISING EDGE FALLING EDGE BOTH EDGE TRIGGER ANY CHANGE unknown RISING EDGE FAITING EDGE BOTH EDGE ON OFF 2 Resolution Input the sampling resolution the default value is the least resolution 8ms its range is 8ms 1000ms The input value uses the multiple of the 8ms 3 Time limit When the sampling mode is set to periodic cycle then display this parameter Input the performance time of the trace The numerical range of the periodic cycle is determined by the value of the resolution or the specified signal address quantity and its range is displayed at the right side S D O D o 4 Frame limit When the sample mode is set to signal change then display this parameter Input the sampling
65. on initialization which is the composed parameter of binary system the No O ladder diagram is used when this value is set to 0 when this value is set to 1 15 the No 1 15 ladder diagrams are then used The ladder diagram file for loading some one number is called operation file 95 S D O o D um o O Gr Miser Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System this operation may cause hazard it is enabled after restarting when the power is turned off This file may be deleted to rebuild if the format is incorrect So the user should carefully specify the file name of the ladder diagram The overall file names of the ladder diagram must be ladderXX grp XX is serial number otherwise the files may not be identified by the system The file format is described by the system the user can not modify it without the system otherwise it may be deleted or can not be identified 3 M6 is separately called the macro program from O91000 to O91015 when the 0 15 ladder diagrams are used 4 The selection of the ladder diagram The file name can be specified by moving the cursor or inputting the LX LXX X XX is number The system may detect whether the X XX is the known file name by pressing the input key If it does not detect the ladder diagram file should be set up based upon the file name ladderOX grp or ladderXX grp The system may automatically generate two function blocks END1 and
66. panel If the component has been positioned at the current place the new one may replace the old one o Insertion component Positioning the cursor to the place where is required to insert the INSERT component a vacancy is inserted in this place pressing the key and then add the new component pressing the steps of the add component The cursor can be inserted in turn SHIFT Note Ensuring the indicator above the is lighted on when inserting the node DELETE e Component Deletion Delete the current component pressing the key on the panel SHIFT Note Ensuring the indicator above the is lighted on when deleting the current component Add the vertical breakover cable Add a vertical breakover cable at the lower right corner of the current cursor by pressing the soft key Delete the vertical breakover cable The vertical breakover at the lower right corner of the sesosocosooo current cursor can be deleted by pressing the soft key e Insert the horizontal breakover cable a horizontal breakover cable can be inserted at the S D O D um y O current cursor place by pressing the soft key the horizontal breakover cable may replace the component which has been performed at the current position SHIFT e Row insertion The cursor is positioned at any destination row press the on the SHIFT INSERT panel till the indicator above the is lighted up then pre
67. parameters should be rewritten During the flexibility tapping only the bit parameter NO 46 1 is rewritten into O in the following mode K7 7 is changed into O and the code M29 is also used and the dwell time from 1s to 2s of the codes is with the better effect Remark The above corresponds the setting method of the machine without the gear change S 3 D 2 O 5 D o 180 Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram APPENDIX 181 Cra 182 Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram APPENDIX ONE THE USAGE GUIDE OF THE LADDER DIAGRAM OF GSK218MC WITH THE TURRET MAGAZINE 1 Points for Attention during Using the Ladder Diagram when GSK218MC with the Turret Magazine 1 During using the ladder diagram the circuit should be connected strictly based on the requirements 2 During using the ladder diagram PLC parameters should be correctly set and the ladder diagram should comply with the allocation of the machine 3 If the machine has the special control requirements the program should be added in the ladder diagram which requires the technicians have the electrical and PLC knowledge and learn the ladder diagram very well 4 The ladder diagram is only suitable for CNC milling machine or the machining center with the turret magazine If the machine is in the other type it may cause the accident 5 The ladder diagram i
68. return switch KO10 1 0 the alarm occurs when K010 6 1 which reminds the magazine zero position setting is valid Trouble shooting Set K010 6 as 0 About the detailed operation please refer to Chapter HI The usage method and maintenance of GSK218MC CNC system with the turret magazine Alarm information 1244 For the magazine safety tool changing stops due to the abnormal Reason When the magazine changes the tool automatically the tool changing stops or the magazine is detected that it is not in the tool retraction position due to the abnormal the alarm occurs The alarm only reminds the operator that the magazine and the tool number of the spindle are in disorder even the alarm is cleared it doesn t mean the magazine is normal the magazine and the tool number of the spindle should be reset About the detailed operation please refer to Chapter IHE The usage method and maintenance of GSK218MC CNC system with the turret magazine Trouble shooting 1 Press reset key to clear the alarm 2 Readjust the magazine and confirm whether the tool number of the spindle comply with the magazine including the magazine returning to the retraction position the spindle in the tool clamp state whether the current tool case number complies with the current value of CTR100 whether the tool number of the spindle complies with the value of D245 and the spindle can not be with the tool when the value of D245 is 0 Alarm information 1245 There
69. shown below Multiple skip codes can be shared with the same mark number The skip can not be performed each other between the 1 level and the 2 level programmes The skip can not be performed among the subprograms Rebound is allowable but users that should hold the endless cycle may be caused by it The skip can not be performed between main program and subprogram Format ACT JMPB Destination mark number Fig 5 9 1 Controllable condition ACT 0 Do not skip it performs the next code after JMPB ACT 1 Perform the next code after the mark number when the skip jumps to the specified mark number Parameter Lx Specify a skip object mark number Any value from O to 99 can be specified 5 10 LBL Mark Number Function opecify one mark number in the ladder diagram namely JMPB specifies a skip object It is very important to notice that one mark number with xx only can be specified once using LBL It may alarm if it uses repeatedly Format Fig 5 10 1 Parameter xx Specify a skip object mark number its range is 0 99 26 Chapter Five PLC Function Code For example 5 11 TMR Timer Function Delay conducting timer Format ACT ES ws TIMER lei wr lei Fig 5 11 1 Controllable condition ACT 0 close the timer ACT 1 start the timer Refer to the following figure for details TIMER Setting time Fig 5 11 2 Parameter TIMER The timer number indicates by xxx it expresse
70. spindle is in gear I Y3 4 1 the gear I in position detection switch X004 1 is still OFF in the time set by T0021 adjust the time of T0021 or check whether X004 1 is 238 Appendix Two The Usage Guide ON or not When the spindle is in gear II Y3 5 1 the gear I in position detection switch X004 2 is still OFF in the time set by T0022 adjust the time of T0022 or check whether X004 2 is ON or not When the spindle is in gear III Y3 6 1 the gear III in position detection switch X004 3 is still OFF in the time set by T0023 adjust the time of T0023 or check whether X004 3 is ON or not Alarm information 1227 The cycle start can t be operated because the manipulator isn t in the origin Reason When the manipulator isn t in the origin pressing start button in Auto MDI or DNC mode causes the alarm Trouble shooting The manipulator returns to the origin Alarm information 1228 The cycle start can t be operated because the toolcase is in the vertical position Reason When the toolcase is in the vertical position pressing start button in Auto MDI or DNC mode causes the alarm Trouble shooting The toolcase is returned to the level position Alarm information 1229 M06 code should be executed after the mechanical zero return Reason Without executing the mechanical zero return MO6 or M50 code is executed Trouble shooting The mechanical zero return should be executed firstly Alarm information 1230 The too
71. switch mechanical zero point the machine sliding plate moves in negative direction When the block presses the limit switch the system decelerates sent to GSK218MC Pay attention to that the effective width of the block deceleration zero signals should be enough for deceleration which is from meanwhile zero return speed to FL speed set by the system data parameter 99 The width of the block should not be less than 25mm after the limit switch is off with the block the system stops immediately and zero return completes The proximity switch signal is Mechanical zero type of GSK218MC system B Fig 4 8 2 2 Operation steps of mechanical zero return M MACHINE 1 Press ZERO to enter the mechanical zero return mode and then mechanical zero return is displayed at the bottom right corner on LED screen 2 Select X Y or Z axis for mechanical zero return and zero return direction is set by bit parameters NO 7 3 NO 7 5 3 The machine moves along the mechanical zero point before the deceleration point the machine traverses rapidly and the traverse speed is set by the data parameters P100 P103 After touching the deceleration switch the machine traverses to the mechanical zero point the reference point at FL speed set by data parameter P099 During returning the mechanical zero point the coordinate axis stops moving the zero return indicator is ON 3 Operation steps of the mechanical zero return with t
72. system supports 24V zero return and 5V zero return the receiving circuit of signals on the system side is shown as below lt o c 3 4 2 le O O 24V 5V zero zero return return Fig 2 2 3 4 141 Gr MWisexiz Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System The wave of PC signals provided by the user is shown as the following figure Direction of refe return Deceleration siganl 7 Coder PC signal COne turn signal Proximity switch signal Refe PC l point Ignore Fig 2 2 3 5 2 2 4 The Cable Connection Diagram 1 The cables of GSK218MC with DY3 series drive unit mr o S 3 D 2 O 5 D o 142 Chapter Two Connection between Equipments 2 The cables of GSK218MC with DA98 series servo drive unit pn PIN i i i E CZ 2 2 COM 0 RSTP 10 Fig 2 2 4 2 3 The cables of GSK218MC with DA98B series drive unit XS30 31 32 33 DA98B drive SIGNAL PIN 0O SIGNAL A PULS SI SI A EN pus 16 suw 29 LM DG om s 6 sys COM 38 39 RSTP S 3 D 2 O 5 D o o DG 32 99 es PSTP Fig 2 2 4 3 143 S 3 T oO O 5 D 9 Oo 2 3 RS232 Standard Series Interfaces GSK218MC CNC system can communicate with PC through RS232 C series interface GSK218MC communication software must be equipp
73. the GSK218MC series machining center CNC system Volume III Operation Description Introduce the operations of the GSK218MC series machining center CNC system Volume IV Installation and Connection Introduce the installation connection and setting methods of the GSK218MC series machining center CNC system Appendix Introduce the use explanations of the GSK218MC series machining center CNC system and the appendix VI Preface and Precaution Security Responsibility Security responsibility of the manufacturer Manufacturer should take responsibility for the design and structure danger of the motor and the accessories which have been eliminated and or controlled Manufacturer should take responsibility for the security of the motor and accessories Manufacturer should take responsibility for the offered information and suggestions for the user Security responsibility of the users User should know and understand about the contents of security operations by learning and training the security operations of the motor User should take responsibility for the security and danger because of increasing changing or modifying the original motor or accessory by themselves User should take responsibility for the danger without following the operations maintenances installations and storages described in the manual This manual is stored by the last user Sincerely thanks for your friendly supporting
74. the PLC the corresponding alarm may display during storing check the PLC program 5 The data column may display the ladder diagram is converting by pressing the Command list soft key in the PLCGRA interface then control the Conversion soft key Successfully convert displays after converting 6 The data column may display the command list is downloading by pressing the Command list soft key in the PLCGRA interface then press the Download soft key Successfully download displays after the downloading is performed The ladder diagram is converted into the command list downloading to the CNC and then it operates automatically 110 Chapter Three PLC Address and Parameter Setting CHAPTER THREE PLC ADDRESS AND PARAMETER SETTING The addresses and parameters such as the counter timer data list and nonvolatile relay may be used in the PLC the viewing and setting of these addresses and parameter should be performed in the corresponding interface Press the PLCPAR soft key again in the PLCPAR interface then enter the PLC address and parameter setting interfaces refer to the Fig 3 1 which includes the nonvolatile relay timer data list counter F address corresponding with the M function It is used for checking and setting these addresses parameters and data list User can set it after the debugging password is input and gained an authority CA xmi o 0 0 0 0 i 9 1i Koz o o o o o o o 1
75. the high speed shift Parameter No 247 min Medium speed gear at the 3 gear When the code voltage is 10V spindle speed C at the high speed shift Parameter No 248 min the 3 gear S code command is performed with the spindle motor speed code voltage 0 10V and the gear shift selection signal The relationships among the GR1 GR2 and GR3 are shown above Signal Gear shift selection signal GR1 GR2 GR3 lt F034 0 2 gt Type Input signal Function These signals are informed the gear shift selected by PLC Output condition Refer to the gear shift method for the explanation of these signals Gear shift selection signal Input GR1 GR2 GR3 lt G002 0 2 gt Type Input signal Function These signals are informed the current selected gear shift of the CNC Output condition Refer to the gear shift method for the explanation of these signals 79 S D uonounJ Gr Miser Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Gear shift in position signal GEAR lt G002 4 gt Type Input signal Function These signals that are informed the current selected gear shift of the CNC has been performed its in position Output condition Refer to the gear shift method for the explanation of these signals Signal address H7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ww li fh A A A ami pee joe Jew p 8 2 Rigid Tapping Brief The rigid tapping is synchronized the tapping axis and spindle ax
76. the magazine CW or CCW rotation is abnormal 2 The magazine counting switch is abnormal 3 Reset the values of T108 and T103 C About the details refer to chapter II The usage method and maintenance of GSK218MC CNC system with the disc magazine Alarm information 1288 The index worktable releasing is detected abnormal Reason When the worktable is executed the releasing movement Y 1 671 the worktable releasing in position detection switch X2 2 doesn t operate in the time set by T38 Trouble shooting 1 Check whether the worktable releasing in position detection switch is normal 2 Check whether Y 1 6 is output or not 3 Adjust the time set by T38 Alarm information 1289 The index worktable clamping is detected abnormal Reason When the worktable is executed the clamping movement Y 1 7271 the worktable clamping in position detection switch X2 3 doesn t operate in the time set by T39 Trouble shooting 1 Check whether the worktable clamping in position detection switch is normal 2 Check Y1 7 is output or not 3 Adjust the time set by T39 Alarm information 1290 The index worktable clamping device doesn t start Reason When the index worktable clamping device doesn t start K12 4 0 the index worktable releasing or clamping command is executed Trouble shooting Firstly set K12 4 as 1 the index worktable releasing or the clamping command is executed Alarm information 1291 The index worktable can t be rotated beca
77. the previous menu S D O o D um o O The search positioning can be performed by the pageup pagedown and four direction keys on the panel then check the command list 2 7 PLC Operation Steps PLC operation steps 1 Press Set key input the password higher level than the machine tool builder in the Password interface 2 Press the Programmable key in PLCPAR interface enter the check and setting interfaces of the hold nonvolatile relay by pressing the KPAR soft key The PLC can be operated modifying the relative bit of the KOOO and K001 For example K000 7 is set to 1 then memories Refer to the K code list of the Appendix in the Chapter Four Installation Connection for the definition of the relative bit 3 Press the Command list soft key in the PLCGRA interface then press the Stop soft key in the 109 S D O o D um 9 le Gr Miser Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System interface the ladder diagram of current operation is stopped This step can be ignored if the current ladder diagram does not modify 4 The modification of the PLC program compilation is completed by the Basis command Function command and compilation command in the PLCGRA interface Press the Store key the data column prompts Ladder diagram stores successfully means that the storage is performed When some incorrect compilation occurs in
78. time of gear change without the 2000 detection switch When the spindle gear is in position without the detection switch cancel the delay time of 2000 completing gear change in position The delay time of MS finish s0 i worktable releasing ee E worktable clamping AAA no worktable releasing corvette sarong index worktable clamping The delay time of the index 4000 worktable releasing finish The delay ti f the ind e delay ine i ex 4000 worktable clamping finish The delay time 1 of th i ey ums of the 2000 magazine rotating in JOG mode The delay time 2 of th AS of the 2000 magazine rotating in JOG mode Setting the detection delay time 2000 of the magazine stopping Setting the detection delay time 3000 1 of the magazine rotation Setting the detection delay ti etting the detection pay ime 5000 of the toolcase vertical Setting the detection delay ti etting the detection delay time 5000 of the toolcase level The time delay unit of the toolcase vertical finish The time delay unit of the toolcase level finish Appendix Two The Usage Guide INITIAL ee ADDRESS SETTING VALUE ms VALUE T0108 Setting the PRENON ceray time 3000 2 of the magazine rotation Setting the time of compelling T0109 to stop the magazine rotation 5000 due to the abnormal The detection delay time T0110 of the manipulator tool 2000 hold and origin return The detection delay time T0111 of the manipulator falling 4000 downward for tool change
79. to 1 after the overall functions are completed Signal address 47 6 5 4 3 H2 H1 0 E AA 7 4 Miscellaneous Function Lock Brief It is forbidden to perform the specified M S and T functions This function is used for detecting the program even if the code signal and strobe signal are not output Signal Miscellaneous function lock signal AFL G021 3 Type Input signal Function This signal selects the miscellaneous function lock That is this signal is not permitted to perform the specified S T and partition M functions 76 Chapter Seven M S T Function Motion When the signal is set to 1 the functions of the control unit are shown below 1 As for the Auto DNC and MDI operations the control unit does not perform the specified M S and T functions namely the code and strobe signals are not output 2 This signal is set to 1 after the code signal is output normally perform the output operation till it ends to the manual FIN signal and the strobe signal is set to 1 3 The miscellaneous functions for example MOO M01 M02 and MO3 can be performed even if this signal is set to 1 The overall code strobe and encoding signals are output based upon the normal method 4 The miscellaneous functions M98 and M99 can be performed based upon the normal method even if this signal is set to 1 however the performance result does not output in the control unit Caution The spindle analog output is still performed
80. tool detection device and K12 0 is set as 1 and the spindle tool is clamped and the spindle tool number is 0 M06 or M50 code is executed while the system detects that the spindle is with the tool Trouble shooting Check whether the signal of X2 7 is normal or not unload the spindle tool and execute M06 tool change code Alarm information 1273 The tool advance can t be operated because the current tool number of the toolpot is with a tool 205 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Reason When the magazine is with the tool detection advice and K12 1 is 1 the spindle is with a tool while the system detects that the magazine is with a tool when the magazine advance is operated Trouble shooting 1 Check whether the signal of X5 5 is normal or not 2 Check whether the tool number of the magazine is complied with that of the spindle including the magazine returning to the tool retraction position the spindle is in the tool clamping state whether the current tool case number is complied with the current value of CTR100 whether the tool number of the spindle is complied with the value of D245 and the spindle can t load any tool if the value of D245 is 0 otherwise the magazine zero return is executed About the detailed operation please refer to Chapter I The usage method and maintenance of GSK218MC CNC system with the turret magazine Alarm information 1274 The magazine can t advance because the t
81. transducer is corresponding to 10V voltage Data parameters No 247 2 47 The maximum speed corresponding to gear 2 When the spindle is in gear II the maximum speed is the spindle one when the transducer is corresponding to 10V voltage Data parameters No 248 2 4 8 The maximum speed corresponding to gear 3 When the spindle is in gear III the maximum speed is the spindle one when the transducer is corresponding to 10V voltage Data parameters No 250 2 5 0 The maximum speed of the motor during the spindle gear change The maximum speed is the motor one when the transducer is corresponding to 10V voltage Data parameters No 251 2 15 1 The motor speed during the spindle gear change relative to the speed of data parameter 251 Remark 1 When the machine is with the automatic gear change device K8 4 is set as 1 otherwise 0 When the automatic gear change is invalid the maximum speed of gear 1 is defaulted and 24622472248 2 When the spindle gear detection isn t with the detection switch K9 3 should be set as 1 otherwise 0 3 When the spindle is I O point control K4 0 should be set as 1 4 11 The External Cycle Start and Feed Hold o Relative signals ST The external automatic cycle start signal and it is same as the function of the automatic cycle start key on the m
82. type is correct or not Alarm information 1269 The spindle orientation time sequence is detected abnormal Reason Before executing the spindle orientation the system has already detected the spindle orientation finish signal Trouble shooting Detect whether X5 0 signal is normal or not and the switch type is right or not Alarm information 1270 The tool change can t be operated because Z axis doesn t return to the mechanical zero point Reason After the system powers on or the emergency stop M06 or M50 code is executed before Z axis returns to the mechanical zero return Trouble shooting Firstly execute Z axis zero return operation and then the tool change Alarm information 1271 The magazine stops revolving due to the abnormal Reason 1 After the magazine sends the rotation command the pulse signal isn t detected in the time set by T109 which is sent by the magazine counting switch X5 3 2 During the magazine rotating it exceeds the time set by T103 when the magazine counting switch is O or 1 Trouble shooting 1 The output of the magazine CW or CCW rotation Y3 0 and Y3 1 is abnormal 2 The magazine counting switch is abnormal 3 Reset the values of T109 and T103 About the detailed operation please refer to Chapter I The usage method and maintenance of GSK218MC CNC system with the turret magazine Alarm information 1272 The spindle tool number is detected abnormal Reason When the spindle is loaded the
83. voso X945 8 Undefined Y0s2 X945 9 Unfmd voso X95 9 ThespndeCWrollon Y 006 4 XS23 12 Switching between i ee ee Y006 5 XS23 Clamping at zero speed S j D 2 O 5 D o 156 Chapter Four Machine Debugging CHAPTER FOUR MACHINE DEBUGGING This chapter introduces some methods and steps of installing debugging and trial running GSK218MC system After the following debugging steps are completed the machine can be operated correspondingly 4 1 Debugging Ready Debugging GSK218MC can be operated as the following steps e Connection of the system The correct connection is the base of the system debugging e PLC debugging Make the system safety function such as the emergency stop and hardware limit etc and the operation function effective O Setting the drive unit parameters Set the parameters of the motor type and the control mode etc O Setting the system parameters Set the control and the speed parameters etc e Data backup After the system debugging the data such as the parameter compensation data and PLC program should be backup Pay attention to the following matters before debugging and running GSK218MC O Check the fly wheel diobe polar of the relay and the solenoid valve to guarantee all the cables connected correctly e Check the connection phase sequence of strong current cables of the motor e Check the corresponding relations between the position control cable the
84. with the 4 axis limit alarm one 160 Chapter Four Machine Debugging State parameters 011 1 BFA LZR LZR 1 Detect the limit after power on before the manual reference point return 0 Not detect the limit after power on before the manual reference point return BFA 1 When the overrun command occurs the system alarms after overtravel 0 When the overrun command occurs the system alarms before overtravel The system parameter numbers 0 31 G13 G13 1 It is set as G13 mode during power on or clearing the state 0 It is set as G12 mode during power on or clearing the state The system parameter numbers 016 1 LALM LALM 1 Ignore the limit alarm 0 Not ignore the limit alarm 4 4 Changing the Gear Ratio When the machine traverse distance doesn t comply with the movement distance displayed on the system coordinate the system parameters P160 P163 and P165 P168 can be rewritten to change the electrical gear ratio and then the different mechanical transmission ratios can be applied The fractional frequency and frequency multiplication the electrical gear of the position code pulse should be set In the POSITION mode the various pulse sources can be matched conveniently by setting the parameters therefore the ideal controlled resolution ratio angle pulse required by the c
85. 0 09064 N20 GOO U50 F100 N10 G65 P 1104 Q1 N30 G01 U0 8 G65 H82 P20 Q 1004 R1 N40 M61 eaters N50 GO X100 Z100 G65 H01 P 1001 QO M99 P50 Fig 9 1 1 It means that one function is programmed by the user macro which becomes the general function Namely the data variable changeable and undefinition data can be compiled the program For example the user macro program can be used for the composed technology S D Signal User macro program input signal UI000 UI015 G054 G055 Type Input signal Function Do not offer any function to the controllable unit These signals are regarded as one of the system variable which is read by the macro program and it is used for the interface signal between macro program and PLC The corresponding system variables of these signals are shown below Table 9 1 1 Signal Address Variable Note 1032 is the variable of the 16 bit which is composed as follows uonounJ 81 Gr ESE ES Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Signal address 7 6 5 4 3 2 H 1 0 1032 uioo7 UIOO6 UIOO5 UIO04 UI003 UI002 UI001 UIOO0 4 1032 UI015 UI014 UlO13 UI012 UlO11 UlO10 UIOO9 UIO08 User macro program output signal U0000 U0015 CF054 F055 UO100 UO131 F056 F059 Type Output signal Function Do not offer any function to the controllable unit These signals are regarded as a kind of variable which is read or written by the user macro prog
86. 0 Zero return mode selection without one turn signal MAOB 1 Zero return mode without one turn signal Mode B 0 Zero return mode without one turn signal Mode A The system parameter number 00 7 zmi4 ZMiz ZMly ZMk ZMIx 1 Setting X axis reference point return direction negative 0 Setting X axis reference point return direction positive ZMly 1 Setting Y axis reference point return direction negative 0 Setting Y axis reference point return direction positive ZMIz 1 Setting Z axis reference point return direction negative 0 Setting Z axis reference point return direction positive ZMIA 1 Setting the 4 axis reference point return direction negative 0 Setting the 4 axis reference point return direction positive 170 Chapter Four Machine Debugging Data parameter No 099 0 9 9 ZRNFL ZRNFL The low speed of X Y Z and the 4 axis return to the reference point which are common to all axes Data parameters No 100 No 103 1 0 0 Speed of X axis returning to the reference point 1 0 1 Speed of Y axis returning to the reference point 1 0 2 Speed of Z axis returning to the reference point 1 03 Speed of the 4 axis returning to the reference point 4 9 Controlling the Input and Output Signals during the Spindle CW and CCW Rotation o Relative signal M03 The spindle CW rotation M04 The spindle CCW rotatio
87. 016 6 Type Input signal Function This signal locks the edit function of the program Operation The program edit function is enabled when signal is set to 1 The program edit function is disabled The program can not be compiled when the signal is set to O The operation panel lock signal LSYS G016 7 gt Type Input signal Function This signal locks the button on machine s operation panel Operation The overall button on the machine s operation panel is locked and disabled when the Signal is set to 1 The machine operation button is enabled when the signal is set to 0 S D Signal address 7 6 5 4 3 H2 H1 0 uonounJ 87 Gr Miser Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System APPENDIX ONE ADDRESS BETWEEN PLC and CNC 1 CNC gt PLC addresses F000 F064 Appendix list 1 Signal 4 Symbol Address Automaticaloperationsignal OP FOO0f7 Detection signal of increment feed MINC FOO3 0 selection Detection signal of MPG feed selection F003 1 JOG feed detection signal F003 2 Detection signal of manual data input MMDI FOO3 3 Affirmance signal of DNC operational MRMT FOO3 4 selection Detection signal of Auto operational MMEM FOO3 5 selection Detection signal of register Edit selection MEDT FOO3 6 Detection signal of mechanical zero MZRO FO03 7 return selection Detection signal of skip optional block MBDT FOO4 0 pide signal of overall axes mach
88. 04 5 Fig 1 3 4 Installation dimension figure of GSK218MC V editing panel 134 Chapter One The System Configuration and Installation c44t0 5 Si 280019 ere teat OUI OE i 3 User installation and machining diagram mal D L AO Y T PY CT tH Hem 3 HI EL SA S j D Q O 5 5 D o o M As di E O El ql z s 6 E B D E i iy E pu 1 VS di ES NH 33 Fig 1 3 5 Installation dimension figure of GSK218MC V operation panel 135 Cr PES E E Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 1 4 The Additional Panel Figure The additional panel of GSK218MC integration system is selected by the customers The extension holes on the panel are user defined such as the emergency stop the program lock the system power on and off feed hold cycle start and MPG etc The following are optional parts of GSK218MC integration system MPG Changchun LGF 001 100 Additional panel Aluminum 460mmx130mm which can be assembled under the panel Emergency stop button LAY3 02ZS 1 Unself lock button K
89. 05 4 For magazine safety the tool change stops due to the abnormal 1245 A005 5 Without the tool number code or the TAE number in the tool list 1246 A005 6 spindle releasing clamping tool jo le detection abnormal 232 Appendix Two The Usage Guide PMC A ADDRESS ALARM CONTENT ALARM NUMBER 1247 A005 7 he spindle orientation time sequence BENIN E 1248 A006 0 Condition of executing T code tool number BINNEN RM 1249 A006 1 Tool advance can t be operated due to the BINNEN RM 1250 A006 2 The tool advance cant be executed because the spindle is not same as the current tool number in the magazine 1252 A006 4 Z axis can t be moved in the tool BINNEN RN 1253 A006 5 Caution to operate the magazine adjusting AA gt 1254 A006 6 Cycle start cant be executed in the mo owe magazine debugging mode 1255 A006 7 The origin can t be returned during tool mmm on Met Sete ot 1256 A007 0 The tool change position can t be returned a a o 1257 A007 1 The tool change position can t be returned A tet spe done poston d 1258 A007 2 The tool change position can t be returned n MT aetemenomrednoma 1259 A007 3 The tool change can t be operated due to T m a 1260 A007 4 Cycle start cant be executed during returning to tool change position in JOG mode 1261 A007 5 Tool retraction cant be operated because NNNM P RM 1262 A007 6 Excess the safety position 1263 A007 7 Caution to operate the manipulator 1264 A008 0 Switching s
90. 1 0 root po wj jJ Jj oy S D uonounJ 84 Chapter Ten Display Setting CHAPTER TEN DISPLAY SETTING 10 1 Clock Function Brief The Year Month and Day are displayed on the setting screen The system variable of the user macro program can be read the time Read and write can be performed for the time information 10 2 Display the Operation Record Brief This function can be displayed the current error Operator performs the history records to the MDI key and signal when the alarm occurs 10 3 Help Function S D Brief The CNC alarm and the details of the CNC operation can be displayed on the screen using the help function Detailed information of alarm The help screen displays the generated alarm and that how to release the alarm information However the information from the P S alarm is displayed which is easy to be distorted or misunderstood uonounJ 85 S D uonounJ Gr Miser Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System CHAPTER ELEVEN MEASURING 11 1 Skip Function Brief Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move following the G31 like GO1 If an external signal is input during the execution of this command execution of the command is interrupted and the next block is executed The skip function is used when the end of measuring is not programmed but specified with a signal from the machine for example in grinding It is used also
91. 1 4 E NO YES positioning finish K041 5 id our as rotation signal during NO YES the spindle orientation Whether detect the spindle with a tool is K012 0 l NO YES valid or not Whether the spindle tool detection switch is K012 1 NO YES NC type Whether detect the current magazine K012 2 S NO toolpot with a tool is valid or not 190 Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram ADDRESS DEFINITION STATE 0 STATE 1 Whether the toolpot detection switch is NC K012 3 vam index worktable K012 4 isa al device K012 5 Whether the IX worktable clamps or NO YES releases automatically Whether the index worktable enters the K012 6 l NO YES debugging mode K013 4 Whether X axis uses the zero return switch K013 5 Whether Y axis uses the zero return switch K013 6 Whether Z axis uses the zero return switch Whether the 4 axis uses the zero return switch K015 0 Whether it is the operation panel B Whether the keypad combined magazine K015 6 UE 9 NO YES control button is valid Whether the external magazine control K015 7 Ld gus NO YES button is valid Points for attention 1 When the system is running normally please make sure the states of K000 0 K000 1 K000 2 K000 3 K000 4 K000 5 K000 6 K000 7 K005 2 and K010 7 are 0 otherwise the accident may happen 2 After rewriting K001 0 parameter the parameter becomes valid until the system restarts When K001 0 0 the magazine isn t used K010 1 K010 2
92. 1 in the MDI mode Input Input data display MDI mode Current working mode Return Return to the previous menu gt Enter to the next page The set value can be downloaded to the CNC operation pressing the lt Save gt key after modifying TMR downloading successful displays after the save is performed the system displays downloading fail when the save is incorrect the illegal downloading parameter displays without downloading conditions The search and positioning can be performed by the pageup pagedown and four direction keys on the panel checking and modifying of the timer address can be performed 3 3 Data List Press the DATA soft key in the Fig 3 1 then enter the checking and setting interface of the data list refer to the Fig 3 3 1 No aon DATA 000 oeoo d Z AE DATA 0000000 11 28 51 S D O o D um o O pp Fig 3 3 1 The content and operation of the data list RUN The operation state of the ladder diagram NO Serial number of the data list Do not change ADDR Data list address Do not change DATA Data list setting value it can be changed after the K000 0 PLC parameter allows modification is set to 1 in the MDI mode Input Input data display MDI mode Current working mode 113 S D O D o Gr ESE ES Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System
93. 1414 PCP Dov VGR VGR 1 The gear ratio of the spindle and the position encoder can be random 0 The gear ratio of the spindle and the position encoder can be random DOV 1 The override is valid during the rapid tapping retraction 0 The override is invalid during the rapid tapping retraction PCP 1 It is the tapping cycle of the deep hole at high speed during the flexibility tapping 0 It is the tapping cycle of the standard deep hole during the flexibility tapping System parameter number 0 45 OVS OVU TDR NIZ NIZ 1 The smooth processing is operated during rigid tapping 0 The smooth processing is not operated during rigid tapping TDR 1 During the rigid tapping feeding the same time constant is used during tool retraction 0 During the rigid tapping feeding the same time constant is not used during tool retraction OVU 1 The tool retraction override is 10 during rigid tapping 0 The tool retraction override is 1 during rigid tapping OVS 1 The feedrate override selection and the override cancel signal are valid during rigid tapping 0 The feedrate override selection and the override cancel signal are invalid during rigid tapping oystem parameter number 04 6 ORI SSOG SSOG 1 The spindle control mode is servo when the tapping starts 0 The spindle control mode is following when the tapping starts 178
94. 221 A002 5 he spindle tool releasing detected 1222 A002 6 he spindle temperature detected 1223 A002 7 The spindle speed detected abnormal 1224 A003 0 he spindle motor enable detected abnormal 231 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System PMC A ADDRESS ALARM CONTENT ALARM NUMBER 1225 A003 1 The spindle orientation in position detected A ei 1227 A003 3 The cycle start can t be executed if the manipulator isn t in the origin 1228 A003 4 The cycle start can t be executed because BINNEN Pr 1229 A003 5 The mechanical zero return should be BINNEN P eects oe 1230 A003 6 The tool change can t be executed in the BINNEN nm O 1231 A003 7 The tool change cant be executed because the toolcase isnt in the level position EN A004 0 The magazine rotation in position detected II PA 1233 A004 1 The magazine rotation motor overload 1234 A004 2 The mechanical manipulator arm motor Ml dl n 1235 A004 3 magazine traverse in position p detected abnormal 1236 A004 4 The magazine zero return detected 1237 A004 5 Zero return should be operated again due AA ng 1238 A004 6 The toolcase level and vertical detected II Loma ee Set 1239 A004 7 The spindle can t be rotated if the toolcase Y AR isn t in the level position 1240 A005 0 Zero return should be operated again due AA emana o 1241 A005 1 The toolcase vertical direction detected AA a 1242 A005 2 The toolcase level direction detected 1244 A0
95. 263 3 X signal X0 0 The Code and Meaning of X6 7 occoccccccccccccconocococococonnonononnnnnncncnnnnnnnononnnnnnos 263 4 Y Signal YO 0 The Code and Meaning of Y5 oocccccccccnccccccccncocncocononnnoncnoncncnanonaninnnnnns 263 5 K signal K6 0 The Code and Meaning of K63 7 occoocccccccccnccocococncocnccononocnnncncnnnnnnnnnnnnonnns 264 6 A signal AO 0 The Code and Meaning of A31 7 ccccccccccceecceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeesseeeseeees 264 TENA EnG SS VMDOL stas deti od abinde d Sutton onto a lanai ace AS a eas 264 XIII XIV Chapter One The Compilation Schedule of the Sequence Programming euin oA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q VOIUME I PROGRAMMING EUIS y A O Q Q 3 3 Q Chapter One The Compilation Schedule of the Sequence Programming CHAPTER ONE THE COMPILATION SCHEDULE OF SEQUENCE PROGRAMMING 1 1 GSK218MC Series PLC Specification GSK218MC series PLC specification is shown below Table 1 1 1 Specification GSK218MC Series PLC Program level The 1 level program execution cycle SUS Basis code average treatment time V Programming capacity 4700 steps Code Basis code function code Internal relay 0 511 byte PLC alarm detection 0 31 byte Nonvolatile memory area Timer 0 127 word Counter C 0 127 word Data base D 0 255 word Nonvolatile relay K 0 63 byte Counter prevalue data register DC 0 127 word Timer prevalue data r
96. 7 as O Alarm information 1255 The origin can t be returned during the tool clamping Reason Z axis is returned to the origin when the magazine is in the tool advance position and the spindle tool is clamped Trouble shooting 1 The magazine is in the tool retraction position 2 The spindle tool is released Alarm information 1256 The tool can t be returned to the tool change when the tool is clamped Reason Z axis is returned to the tool change position when the magazine is in the tool advance position and the spindle tool is in the clamping state Trouble shooting 1 The magazine is in the tool retraction position 2 The spindle tool is released 243 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Alarm information 1257 The tool change position can t be returned because the spindle doesn t position Reason Z axis returns to the tool change position when the magazine is in the tool advance position and the spindle doesn t position Trouble shooting 1 The magazine is in the tool retraction position 2 The spindle is positioned Alarm information 1258 The tool change position can t be returned due to the magazine abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1259 The tool change can t be operated due to T code tool number abnormal Reason The wrong T code is executed before executing M06 code The wrong T codes are The tool numbers not specified by T code exist in the
97. 8MC is used K015 0 1 the operation panel of GSK990MA is used List IV The definitions of PLC external alarm PLC alarm AADDRESS INFORMATION number The lubrication oil detection abnormal 1208 A001 0 The machine control box temperature detection abnormal 1209 A001 1 The machine bed temperature detection abnormal 1210 A001 2 The machine vibration frequency detection abnormal 1218 A002 2 Confirm the tool number again after the magazine NS enema 1219 A002 3 The spindle cant revolve in the magazine tool OU e 2 MY 1225 A003 1 The spindle orientation in position detection abnormal 1226 A003 2 The spindle gear abnormal 192 Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram PLC alarm A ADDRESS INFORMATION number 1228 A003 4 The cycle start cant be executed when the II ee 1230 A003 6 The tool can t be changed during the spindle tool IO ee 1231 A003 7 The tool can t be changed when the magazine isn t IN rr 1232 A004 0 The magazine rotation in position detection 1234 A004 2 The program stops running when the magazine is in EUN oM 1235 A004 3 The magazine traverses in position detection 1236 A004 4 The magazine zero return detection abnormal The magazine origin position lost and zero return should be executed again 1238 A004 6 The tool advance in position detection abnormal 1239 A004 7 The tool retraction in position detection abnormal 1240 A005 0 The magazine is abnormal and zero return should be execute
98. A100 and CTR100 is less than 100 For example When the magazine capacity is 16 DATA100 and CTR100 are set as 16 E Setting the tool number in the magazine The data list D001 D099 respectively corresponds to the toolcase NO 1 NO 99 of the magazine the setting value of the data list DOO1 DO99 respectively corresponds to the tool number NO 1 NO 99 of the toolcase D245 is the tool number of the spindle Points for attention 1 The same tool number except for 0 can t be set in D001 D099 otherwise during the tool change the alarm occurs 2 The setting range of the tool number should satisfy the requirement set by data parameter 0206 otherwise during executing T code the system alarms For example If the magazine capacity is 16 and 1 16 is set in D1 D16 in order 8 toolcase is rotated into the tool change position and change the tool during executing T8 M6 If 10 20 30 160 are set in D1 D16 in turn during executing T80 M6 8 tool case is rotated into the tool change position and the tool is changed If D1 and D2 are also set as 8 the system alarms during executing T8 M6 214 Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram F Setting the time parameters relative with the magazine VALUE ms rome uM positioning finish The time delay unit of the spindle Greater or equal to O tool releasing finish roe T en tool clamping finish spindle tool releasing releasing time spindle tool clamping
99. C enters into the reset state and stops in the following states 1 When the ESP signal is set to 1 2 Press the RESET key on the MDI Automatic operation interruption The feed hold signal SP is set to 1 during the automatic operation the CNC enters into the dwell state and stops At the same time the cycle start light STL is cleared to 0 and the feed hold indicator SPL is set to 1 The automatic operation will not restart even if the SP signal is cleared to O again If the restart automatic operation should be performed again the SP signal should be cleared to 0 and then the ST signal is set to 1 then clears to O Signal Cycle start signal ST G0231t 6 Type Input signal Type Start the automatic operation Operation ST is set to 1 in DNC or MDI mode during the automatic operation the CNC then enters into the cycle start state and starts to operate Feed hold signal SP G023 7 Type Input signal Function Automatic operation interruption Operation SP signal is set to 1 and CNC enters into the feed hold state and stops during the automatic operation When the SP signal is set to 0 the automatic operation can not be started 64 Chapter Five Automatical Operation Cycle start indicator signal STL F000 5 Type Output signal Function The PLC is entered into the automatic operation start already Output condition The signal can be set to 1 or 0 which is determined by CNC state refer to the Fig 5l
100. Download the command list to the CNC automatically operate the PLC ladder diagram Stop Stop the operation of the ladder diagram Return Return to the previous menu The positioning can be performed by the pageup downpage and four direction keys and then check the command list S D O o D y 108 Chapter Two PLC Programming Operation 2 6 Compilation Command PLCGRA ladder 1 ASIE KOOS e Faas e AXBBb 7 K007 5 Dan Kags e Fans 1 Ra887 6 Baa e Kaas e Fans 1 ROG 7 ABBB 4 KOOS e Fans 1 Ra88 Baa 6 Kags 2 Fans 1 000 000 1 Ra88 1 Kags e Fans 1 008 2 Baa 3 RGBE e Kaos e Fans 1 REPLACE RETURN Fig 2 6 1 The content and operation of the command list interface 1 1178 Display the current position of the cursor and the total line number of the ladder diagram RUN The operation state of the ladder diagram Input Display the input data MDI mode Current working mode Copy Press this key after entering G12 1 the ladder diagram between cursor and G12 1 can be duplicated Paste Paste the copied diagram to the ladder diagram Deletion Press this key after entering the G12 1 the ladder diagram between the cursor and G12 1 can be deleted Replacement Input the replaced the signal address then press this key the system may prompt whether it is replaced or replaced completely Y Replaced N Do not replace A Replaced completely Return Return to
101. EF 1 Allowance signal of reference position detection along with Y axis S D PREF 2 Allowance signal of reference position detection along with Z axis PREF 3 Allowance signal of reference position detection along with A axis End signal of the 1 reference position return ZP11 ZP14 F041 0 3 uonounJ End signal of the 2 reference position return ZP21 ZP24 F042 0 3 End signal of the 3rd reference position return ZP31 ZP34 F043 0 3 End signal of the 4 reference position return ZP41 ZP44 F044 0 3 Type Output signal Function This signal shows that the machine tool has been held in the reference position of the controllable axis These signals are one to one corresponding with the axes Table 4 2 2 End signal of reference position return along with X axis End signal of reference position return along with Y axis End signal of reference position return along with Z axis End signal of reference position return along with A axis Output condition This signal is enabled when the detection allowance signal G57 G58 and G59 of the reference position is set to 1 The signal becomes 1 when the following states are displayed e The manual reference position return has been completed and its current position is performed in the in position area 61 S D uonounJ Gr Miser Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System e The automatical reference pos
102. ES is with the external cycle start Whether th t K005 2 LEE RON A NO YES enters the debugging mode K006 0 X axis limit switch selection 2 switches 1swith K006 1 Y axis limit switch selection 2switches 1switeh K006 2 Z axis limit switch selection 2 switches 1 switch K006 3 The 4 axis limit switch selection 2 switches 1 switch Whether X axis zero return K006 4 NO YES switch is normally open type Whether Y axis zero return K006 5 switch is normally open type Whether Z axis zero return K006 6 l l NO switch is normally open type Whether the 4 axis zero return K006 7 l l NO switch is normally open type Whether cancel K007 4 th TM NO the 4 hardware limit K007 5 Whether cancel Cr Iaz ADDRESS K007 6 K007 7 K008 0 K008 1 K008 2 K008 4 K008 5 K008 6 K008 7 009 0 009 1 K009 2 009 3 K009 4 009 5 009 6 K010 1 K010 2 K010 3 228 Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System USER STATE DEFINITION A STATE1 SETTING VALUE the external emergency stop o o Whether the spindle output NO YES 10V 10V analog voltage Whether use the spindle position mode Normally open type Whether the tool clamping or leasing i ntrolled by the panel xd rae releasing is co J P button button button Wheth the tool E eplle e e YE NO clamping releasing device Whether th indl o ether the spindle N YES
103. GAG coniun tictss Sete a a 157 AS aii titu eiui eui aduer aac a wae Smee h hs bet d e EE ICE oa 158 4 3 Emergency Stop and LElirmil iei re trn nui epo i ned cd 158 44 Changing the Gear allo A a ta pif 161 45 Backlash GombensatlOF eco eoo n a oU v ee Eo e tube oct lud 162 4 6 Setting the Drive Unit else nennen nennen nnne nnns nnns nnns nnns 164 XII Contents 4 7 The Machine Screw Pitch Compensation occoocccocccocncccncococonoocnoncoconoconconnnornnnrnonnnarnnnnnnnnnns 165 4 8 Mechanical Zero Return Machine Zero Return cccoccccoccccocnconnncncncocnnonncnnnnnncncnanonaninononos 167 4 9 Controlling the Input and Output Signals during the Spindle CW and CCW Rotation 171 4 10 The Spindle Automatic Gear Change CoONTTOl ocooocccccccccccoccncocnconnnonncnncnnncncnnnonaninnnnnns 172 4 11 The External Cycle Start and Feed Hold occcooccconccocncocncccconoccnonncnanococonacnnonncnaninnnnnns 173 4 12 The External Editing Lock and the External Operation Panel Lock 174 4 13 Cooling Lubricating and Chip Removal Control ooccoocccocncoccncccncnocnconcncnnnccanonaninonoss 175 4 14 Setting the Relative Feedrate cooocccocccocnoccnccocononnnoonocononncnonononnnonannnnanonannnncnonanenaninos 176 4 15 Setting the Relative Tapping Parameters oocccccncccccocccoccncocnccononononnnnnnnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnaninnnnnns 178 APRENDI a 181 AP
104. H 516 B11 green or red Self lock button KH 516 B21 green or red JD S c 3 D 2 O 5 D Q 136 Chapter Two Connection between Equipments CHAPTER TWO CONNECTION BETWEEN EQUIPMENTS 2 1 Connection Diagram of the External System 2 1 1 The Layout of Interface Position Fig 2 1 1 1 GSK218MC interface figure X533 a POWER SUPPLY 24V GND 4TH AXIS X523 X532 SPINDLE Z AXIS XS45 X531 OUTPUT3 Y AXIS XS44 X 30 OUTPUT X AXIS X943 X522 OUTPUT HNAD UNIT MPC X942 X512 A P lt INPUT3 F BUS2 S 3 XS41 9 XS11 gt as J INPUT2 F BUS i fe XS40 XS10 o 7 O O O i j O INPUT1 COMM gt 137 Cr IS Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 2 1 2 The Connection Diagram AAA 220v XS2 Power supply PB2 AC power SUPPIY jj XS11 Bus 1 BUS1 BUS2 BUS1 BUS2 DA98E XS12 Bus 2 l Drive unit n CN1 CN1 feedback signal f feedback signal XS22 Hand unit MPG DAP03 Spindle sevro Servo encoder Power interface Spindle motor XS23 Spindle DA98A B drive unit CN2 feedback signal E Coder Power interface interface XS30 X axis o AAA ECL EY J
105. II oe 27 Zero speed clamp Points for attention 1 About the connection method and points of attention of PLC input part Y refer to chapter IV 2 When use the ladder diagram the users can add the new function into the undefined input part but pay attention to that if the undefined part is used the ladder diagram should be rewritten List 3 KAPA address definitions ADDRESS DEFINITION STATE 0 STATE 1 K000 0 Whether allow to rewrite PLC parameters r E K000 1 Whether allow to debug PLC signal K000 2 Whether all Y signals are clear when enters debugging mode K000 3 Whether allow to edit the information of e address A K000 4 Whether allow to edit the information of NO e address K K000 5 Whether allow to edit the information of NO YES address X K000 6 Whether allow to edit the information of NO YES address Y K000 7 Whether allow to operate the command list EEG K001 0 Whether allow to use the magazine K001 1 Whether automatically download an running the ladder diagram K001 2 The level selection of the input signal of the 24v valid Ov valid 188 Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram ADDRESS DEFINITION STATE 0 STATE 1 Whether use the 4 axis Whether the spindle uses the gear control K004 0 l NO YES I O point Whether the manual reference point can Many K004 1 l One axis only control one axis axes Whether the machine is with the external K005 0 NO YES MPG Whether the
106. IN G000 5 and FIN G00070 are set to 1 by PLC when the operation is completed If these functions namely the M S and T code miscellaneous functions are performed simultaneously the end signal FIN GOOOZO can be set to 1 till all of these functions are executed 5 M S and T codes may be performed simultaneously in a block The CNC can be performed next block after affirming the end signal FIN is set to 1 Signal Itis the register signal of the M code miscellaneous function M00 M99 F026 F033 The strobe signal of M code miscellaneous function MFEFD F007 0 Type Output signal Function These signals are specified the miscellaneous function of the PLC Output condition Refer to explanation of the M code miscellaneous function in Section 7 1 for the output condition and execution process Note 1 The following miscellaneous function can be treated in the CNC they can not be outputted even if they are specified in the program M98 M99 x The M code for calling subprogram x The M code for calling the user macro program Note 2 The encoding signal also can be outputted other than the code signal and strobe signal in the following miscellaneous function MOO M01 M02 M30 Note 3 The M codes from the MOO to M39 can be supplied based upon the binary encoding 74 Chapter Seven M S T Function For example M5 is corresponding to the 00000101 M encoding signal DMOO FOO9 7 DMO1 FOO9 6 DMO2 FOO9 5 DM30 FOO9 4
107. Input data display MDI mode Current working mode Return Return to the previous menu gt Enter next page The set value can be downloaded to the CNC operation pressing the Save key after modifying KPAR downloading successful displays after the save is performed the system displays downloading fail when the save is incorrect the illegal downloading parameter displays without downloading conditions Note It can be saved and operated by pressing the Save after modifying KOOO KO05 are used by the system Refer to the Appendix One and Three for details The search and positioning can be performed by the pageup pagedown and four direction keys on the panel checking and modifying of the nonvolatile relay address can be performed 3 2 Timer Press the TMR soft key in the Fig 3 1 then enter the checking and setting interfaces of the timer refer to the Fig 3 2 1 LM M ATA DATA RON 28 41 PATH 1 al KPAR NIN DATA oom RETURN gt Fig 3 2 1 S D O D mm o 112 Chapter Three PLC Address and Parameter Setting The content and operation of the timer RUN Operation state of ladder diagram NO Timer serial number Do no change ADDR Timer address Do not change CURT Current value of the timer Do not change SET Presetting value of the timer it can be changed after the K000 0 PLC parameter allows to be modified is set
108. Input output Signal The treatment of the input signal CNC CNC PLC Shared register The 1 level program Latched at the beginning of the E 2 level The 2 level roqram The 2 ns programinput ______ gt signal latch Machine tool input register KA AA MA d I The treatment of the output signal CNC CNC PLC The 1 Shared register level program The 2 level program Machine tool input register IO terminal Fig 2 5 2 Chapter Two Sequence Programming 2 5 1 Input Signal Treatment 1 NC input register The NC input signals from the NC are memorized into the NC input register which are transferred to PLC each 8ms The 1 level program performs the corresponding treatment using state of these signals 2 Machine tool input register The machine tool input register is scanned and memorized its input signal from the machine each 8ms The 1 level program is also performed the corresponding treatment by using this signals directly 3 The 2 level program input register The 2 level program input signal register is also called the 2 level program synchronic input signal register Wherein the stored input signal is treated by the 2 level program This signal state in the register is synchronic with the 2 level one The signals both in the NC and machine tool input register can be locked to the 2 level program input latch as long as the 2 level program performs The sign
109. O 0 can be set to 1 till all of these functions are executed 6 When the S500 is completed ensuring the PLC is set the response signal SRESP G063 1 to 1 7 M S and T codes may be performed simultaneously in a block The CNC can be performed next block after affirming the end signal FIN is set to 1 73 S D uonounJ S D uonounJ Gr Miser Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 7 3 T Code Miscellaneous Function Brief T code miscellaneous function T code should be used with the M code together for example TO6MO6 When the T code is performed the data address D241 and the strobe signal are sent to PLC and PLC starts or cut off its relative functions using these signals Basis process These signals are used for the following functions Table 7 3 1 Program Output signal Response address Data address signal signal mea os ps Us E SRESP FIN GO070 function D241 F007 3 06322 TFIN GOOZ5 1 It is supposed that the TXX XX is sent to the data address D241 is specified in the program 2 If the non M S and T codes such as the movement and dwell are specified with the miscellaneous function at the same time the miscellaneous function is then simultaneously performed Multiple codes of the miscellaneous function are specified in a block its code will be performed in sequence 3 The strobe signal FOO7 3 is set to 1 when performing TXX 4 The end signal TF
110. OFF the voltage resistance includes the instant voltage below 24 20 4 When the output is OFF the leakage current is below 100UA b The output return circuit CNC side Machine side OV OV O Fig 3 3 1 1 All the output signals of the system are provided by Darlington tube and when the output is valid the corresponding Darlington tube is conducted Except TL TL and SPZD are the pulse signals Not hold output the other outputs are the level signals output hold and the common port of the signal is 24V 3 3 2 The Definitions of the Output Signal Interfaces List 3 3 2 1 ADDRESS SIGNAL INTERFACE DEFINITION i E M voor xs 6 The yellow alarm lamp voro xs 8 The green alarm lamp wwi2 xs 9 Lig S j D 2 O 5 D o o 155 Cr PES E E Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System ADDRESS SIGNAL INTERFACE DEFINITION INTERFACE PIN NO Y002 4 XS44 The handhold unit lamp Y002 5 XS44 Undefined vos xs 18 Hyarane op Y 002 7 XS44 awening between the dl A T e Y003 0 XS44 8 The magazine CW rotation The MAJAZI The magazine CW rotation rotation 003 1 xs 21 The magazine CCW rotation Y003 2 XS44 a The magazine advance Y003 3 XS44 The magazine retraction Y 003 4 XS44 24 The spindle gear 1 frequency IN AS Y003 5 XS44 12 The spindle gear penile II 7 7 Y003 6 XS44 The spiele gear eo ee eee a oe Y04 X945 6 Unefned
111. PENDIX ONE THE USAGE GUIDE OF THE LADDER DIAGRAM OF GSK218MC WITA THE TORREPIMAORZINE estero pop laredo caco losiicacia 183 1 Points for Attention during Using the Ladder Diagram when GSK218MC with the Turret Magazin uia erai an io to a o PL D Ma UE O 183 2 The Allocation and Definitions of I O Address and Internal Software Components in CNC PLC AEN UA cH 183 3 Usage and Maintenance of GSK218MC CNC System with the Turret Magazine 212 APPENDIX TWO THE USAGE GUIDE OF LADDER DIAGRAM OF GSK218MC WITH TRE DISC 21 972 ca eene tete ee ee ee letal 221 1 Points for Attention of Using the Disc Magazine c oocccocccccnccccncccncccncnonoconnnonnonnnnnnncnnnnononos 221 2 The Allocation and Definition of PMC I O Address and the Internal Software Components in GSK2 TSMC ING Sy Sie Mi cuss m etes iE pte dori Coe to Deve ert aes ede A 222 3 Usage and Maintenance of GSK218MC CNC SYSTEM with the Disc Magazine 254 4 Note of GSK218MC CNC System with the Disc Magazine Macro Program 262 APPENDIX THREE THE ALLOCATED FILE FORMAT OF THE LADDER DIAGRAM 263 1 M Code M00 Meaning of F Signal in M99 oocccncncncccccccnncncocnconnncncnnncnonnncnnnnnocnconnonanonnnonos 263 2 in a Single Line Meaning Saving M Code Information End
112. Response address Register signal Strobe signal signal M code M MF MRESP FIN G00040 eae M F02680 F03347 F007 0 G063 0 MFIN GOOO 1 S D 1 It is supposed that the MXX is specified in the program Suppose the register signal is FYYY Y As for the MXX if the user does not register it the alarm may occur User specify a unique F signal registering this M code to the system that is the code signal from F26 to F33 2 If the non M S and T codes such as the movement and dwell are specified with the miscellaneous function at the same time the miscellaneous function is then simultaneously performed Multiple codes of the miscellaneous function are specified in a block its codes may perform in sequence 3 When the MXX is performed the register signal FYY Y and the strobe signal FOO7 0 are set to 1 simultaneously ensuring the PLC sets the response signal RESP G063 0 to 0 4 PLC is set the end signal MFIN G00021 and FIN GOOO 0 to 1 when the operation is performed If these functions namely the M S and T code miscellaneous functions are performed simultaneously the end signal FIN GOOO 0 can be set to 1 till all of these functions are executed 5 When the MXX is completed ensuring the PLC is set the response signal MRESP G63 0 to 1 6 M S and T codes may be performed simultaneously in a block The CNC can be performed next block after affirming the end signal FIN is set to 1 uonounJ 7 2 S Co
113. SSA ne Ef AI 27 912 TMRB Fixed TIE AAA dad rac pet du tata me 28 Sd Sc WIV TIME S Ss eases en cise PIERDE EE OE mEEPHEEN ao E 28 SA CRT BIDIaty C oH Sf tias ob rs al oe ius Rond rae due Rost ber i Rosie osi todas 20 9 19 DEC Biriary Decodilgd ssnsliiskbet usse eii sdiesteiesiia bb sede a ledialds 30 5 16 COD Binary System Code Conversion ooooooccccccnnnnonononcnoconononananonocononannn ano eene eee 31 5 17 COMTGoncentic LNE CONTO Dti daa dis 33 5 18 COME Concentric Line Control End essen 33 5 19 ROT Binary Rotation CONTO ita era i Era ER ta Hs ate ere er Ene ee eerte 33 5 20 SFT Register Displacement ShiftiNQ cccoooonoonnnnnccononananannnnoconannnnononococonnnnnnanananonos 35 5 21 DIFU Rising Edge Dele Clon x as eeiveqei o vb AAA mu 36 5 22 DIFD Descending Edge Detection ssss nne 24 5 23 COMP The Comparison of the Binary Number eene 38 5 24 COIN Consistency Comparison ct 38 S29 MOVN Dalta Transmission naa 39 5 26 MOVB Iransmission of 1 Byte rei rbd mirne c eel E retta ele hd rebar adsense 40 5 27 MOVW Transmission of Two Bytes nennen nennen nene 40 5 28 XMOV Binary Indexed Data Transmission cccnnonococcnccononononananononononannnnnnnocononnananonanonons 4 9 29 DSCH bihiare Data Index caccia tutae tiae tasutu adiu uai eut utta que aa edu arua M tes 42 SS FPES ese T m e 43 S 9 SUB BIS Subtraciofi ito ebbe en eee t ta
114. T0019 The spindle inch time delay unit The time delay unit of the T0020 10 program restarting The time delay unit T0021 10000 of the spindle gear I The time delay unit T0022 10000 of the spindle gear II The time delay unit T0023 10000 of the spindle gear III The detection time of switching T0024 between the spindle 10000 speed position mode M29 executing finish time T0025 it is valid without 4000 the detection signal The positioning finish time in the T0026 spindle position mode it is valid 2000 without the detection signal M28 executing the finish time T0027 It is valid without 2000 the detection signal The detection time of T0028 switching between the 10000 spindle speed position mode 10029 The spindle brake time 1000 T0030 Spindle gear 1 The delay 3000 208 Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram USER INITIAL ADDRESS SETTING VALUE ms VALUE ms time of gear change without the detection switch Spindle gear 2 The delay time T0031 of gear change without 3000 the detection switch Spindle gear 3 The delay time T0032 of gear change without 3000 the detection switch Canceling the delay finish T0033 time in the spindle gear control 3000 without the detection unit Disconnecting in the delay time after the spindle 800 gear change finish The delay time after the index T0036 MAU 500 worktable releasing finish The delay time after the index T0037 worktable clamping finish The delay time aft
115. The magazine CW CCW Normally e X005 5 XS42 12 The magazine zero Optional X005 6 XS42 25 External magazine zero Normally mee P X005 7 XS42 13 External manipulator Normally X006 0 XS22 External MPG X axis Normally X006 1 X922 2 External MPG Y axis Normally X006 2 X922 T External MPG Z axis Normally X006 3 XS22 3 External MPG A axis Normally X006 4 XS22 External MPG step width Normally a IE E A X006 5 XS22 4 External MPG step width Normally A o p ntc X006 6 X922 External MPG step width Normally BEN NF X007 0 XS23 44 Completing to switch Set by between speed position parameters mode X007 1 XS23 21 The spindle orientation Set by pee ommo ee X007 2 X923 5 The spindle speed reach Set by A nen X007 3 X923 20 The spindle zero speed NC contact IT m e Points for attention 1 About the connection method and points for attention of PLC input X address please refer to chapter IV 2 The contacts are divided as Normally open contact NC contact and the contact set by parameters 3 During using the ladder diagram the user can add the new function into the undefined input but it requires to rewrite the ladder diagram so be caution to operate 4 Operation panel USER1 function of button K11 1 0 The switch of chip removal hydrovalve 224 Appendix Two The Usage Guide K11 1 1 Z axis returns to the 1 reference position in JOG mode Function of USER2 button Z axis is returned to the 2 reference position i
116. The switch of the water hydrovalve K11 1 1 Z axis returns to the 1 reference position in JOG mode The function of USER2 button Z axis returns to the 2 reference position in JOG mode The function of USER3 button The switch of starting blowing the spindle List II The interface definitions of the output signals ADDRESS SIGNAL INTERFACE PIN DEFINITION INTERFACE NO Y000 0 XS43 Z axis band type brake Y 000 2 XS43 The tool releasing clamping Y000 3 XS43 Undefined Y000 4 X943 The spindle brake Undefined 186 Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram ADDRESS SIGNAL ilii PIN DEFINITION INTERFACE Yellow lamp vow xe s Geemhm vorz xs 9 Lubialoncoto Y001 6 XS43 25 The index worktable ION a IO RN Y001 7 XS43 The index worktable a ae MAUI JURO HEREDA ves 394 5 Uwe The flushing hydrovalve output Y 002 7 X844 Switching between sore a voso XS9M 8 Themagazne CW rotation Y032 xs o Themagazineadvance Y003 4 XS44 24 The spindle gear I frequency conversion Y003 5 XS44 12 The spindle gear II frequency conversion Y003 6 XS44 25 The spindle gearlll frequency conversion 187 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System ADDRESS SIGNAL Di PIN DEFINITION INTERFACE e oe Wie Undefined voso xs 8 Uem Y052 X5 9 Undefined voo xs23 9 ThespindieCWrotali n Y 006 4 XS23 12 Switching between
117. URING scttsitaiiassc e amarte rede cie a na D reet Lait bt dais 86 TASK 0081 0 81 A cado 86 CHAPTER TWELVE PANEL LOCK SETTING ret sti 87 VOLUME IIl OPERATION EXPLANATION es iiio dU EE E ONDE E QUIE HEIDE 93 CHAPTER ONE PLOINTERFACE DISPLAY e tec aa 95 1 1 GSK218MC The Automatic Operation in PLC ON eee 05 1 2 Programmable Interface Display essen nennen 95 CHAPTER TWO PLC PROGRAMMING OPERATION c cccccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeueeeaeeeeeeeeeseens 103 2 2 BASS COdQu ASS CASE ae es 104 2 3 The Operation Explanation of the Ladder Diagram cccccnnnnnouoncnccononananannnnocononananonoss 105 Ze SU aea dde ENERO iad achiral Goi II A 107 2 9 Sommand Table ni da tii 108 215 Compilation COMMAND deacon dat Uc asa EE dU 109 220 ACEO DC Lal Ol DLO DS tested nd inten 109 CHAPTER THREE PLC ADDRESS AND PARAMETER SETTING een 111 9 1 INonvolaule Hold Relays edo so a ete di 111 SCIT 112 A UU TEA TT 113 PAC OUN NER RE ENERO ERR 114 3 5 M function corresponding to the F addressS cccooooooccccccconononanacanonononannnononccoconananannnanonons 115 CHAPTER FOUR THE USER EXPLANATION OF THE LADDER DIAGRAM SOFTWARE EDIT em AA Ig E N 117 A A Biel einai E A U 117 A 2 SOM Ware NTO CUO a 117 A 3 SOMWAlS ODeralO Minsa a ac 119 VOLUME IV INSTALLATION AND CONNCETION een 127 CHAPTER ONE
118. achine panel SP Feed hold signal and it is same as the function of the feed hold key on the machine panel e Signal diagnosis The parameter diagnosis the input state on the system side STATE X1 6 X1 5 ADDRESS 173 S 3 D 2 O 5 D o o Cr IS Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System PIN NO XS40 25 XS40 12 X1 5 The external cycle start X1 6 The external feed hold e The signal internal connection About SP ST signal internal circuit refer to the following figure 4 11 1 System side SP ST Fig 4 11 1 e The external circuit About the connection between SP and ST signals refer to the following figure 4 11 2 system side SP ST XS40 socket Fig 4 11 2 e Rewriting the following parameters ADDRESS DEFINITION STATE 0 STATE 1 SETTING VALUE Whether the machine is NO YES 1 with the external cycle start 4 12 The External Editing Lock and the External Operation Panel Lock The relative signals LEDT The external editing lock signal When the signal is 1 the program can be edited and it is same as the function of the program switch on the system LSYS The external operation panel lock signal When the signal is 1 all the operation keys on the machine are locked S C j D 2 O 5 D H Signal address HT 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 174 Chapter Four Machin
119. agazine clamping detection switch X2 6 is still OFF in the time set by T010 Trouble shooting 1 Detect whether the magazine clamping detection switch is normal or not 2 Detect whether YO 2 is output or not 3 Readjust the time of TO10 Alarm information 1221 The spindle tool releasing is detected abnormal Reason When the tool is released Y2 0 1 the magazine releasing detection switch X2 5 is still OFF in the time set by TOO9 Trouble shooting 1 Detect whether the magazine releasing detection switch is normal or not 2 Detect whether YO 2 is output or not 3 Readjust the time of T009 Alarm information 1222 The spindle unit temperature is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1223 The spindle speed is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1224 The spindle motor enable is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Without Alarm information 1225 The spindle orientation in position is detected abnormal Reason When the spindle is executed positioning Y2 1 1 the spindle positioning detection switch X7 1 is still connected in the time set by TO13 Trouble shooting 1 The spindle drive unit or the spindle encoder is abnormal 2 Detect whether Y6 3 is output or not 3 Readjust the time of T013 Alarm information 1226 The spindle gear is abnormal Reason The spindle gear is detected abnormal Trouble shooting When the
120. al state in this latch keeps invariable during the performance of the 2 level program 2 5 2 The Treatment of the Output Signal 1 NC output register The output signal transfers to the NC output register from the PLC each 8ms 2 Machine tool output register The signal memorized in the machine tool output register conveys to the machine tool each 8ms Note The signal states such as the NC input register NC output register machine input register and machine output register which can be displayed by the self diagnosis function The diagnosis number is the address number in the sequence programming 2 5 3 The Distinguish of the Signal State Between the 1st Level and the 2nd Level Program As for the same input signal their states may different between the 1 and 2 level programming that is the reason that different registers are used between two levels programming Namely the input signal used with the 2 level program is the one of the 1 level who is locked And therefore the signal in the 2 level program is later than the 1 level one At the worst case one 2 level program performance cycle can be lagged It is better to remember this point when programming the ladder diagram It belongs to the 2 partition of the 2 level program SWINJOA D A O Q Q 3 gt Q euin oA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q A 1 performs the 1 level program when the 1 8ms is performed then B 1 A
121. and edit command PLCGRA ladder 1 KOOS e Faas e XBBb 7 ABB KOOS e Fans 1 Ra887 6 Baa e Kaas e Fans 1 RaaB 7 ABBB 4 KaB5 e Fabs 1 Ra88 Baa 6 Kaas e Fans 1 ABB 008 1 hase 1 KGa e Fans 1 008 2 Baa 3 ROSS e Kaos e Fans 1 MEA DATA PA FUNC ESTPCMD EDIT RETURN Fig 2 1 1 2 PLCPAR interface includes CRT TMR DATA KPAR and MDEC Enter PLCRAR interface pressing the PLCPAR soft key refer to Fig 1 2 3 1 Enter the PLCPAR classification operation interface by controlling PLCRAR again refer to the Fig 2 1 2 The parameter modification PLC operation state control and entering the I O debugging mode should be performed after the limitation above the debugging is gained Refer to the Chapter Three for details 000 xms o o o o o o o o Kma o o o o 0 o 0 o eieile o eGieile o eieile o lololo clejele eieio m oGiele o eielerim Xs o o o o o o 1 o Kos o o o o o o o o K007 reno o o o o o o o o xe 0 o o o o o o o DATA Rd 11 88 43 PATH 1 Fig 2 1 2 Ue GO CG Ue e S O S CG G G G G CG CG G G G G CG S S S SO O SO S SO P SO O O S S S O O RW O 9 e 9 9 9 c c c c c c c 103 S D O D um y et O Gr WEI Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 2 2 Basis Code Enter the basis command operation interface pressing the Basis command soft key in the Fig 2 1 1 Refer to th
122. and the data length is consistent with the length S2 It is used for outputting NOT operational result The result of the NOT operation starts to store from this address and the length of the data is consistent with the one of the length For example When the address A and B have the following data which are shown below Address A L3 qp T 1 9 jojo The operation result of the NOT is shown below ida EEE ME EEE 5 35 EOR Exclusive OR Function This code is performed the Exclusive OR with a constant or the content from the address B from the content of the address A and its result is stored to address C Format pu Length S1 S2 m EOR Format Constant or specifying Address A address B Address C Fig 5 35 1 47 Controllable condition ACT 0 Do not perform the EOR code ACT 1 Perform the EOR code Parameter lt 2 Length Specify the data length 1 byte or 2 bytes input the data format constant or address BEEN D U Format Data length O specifying specifying Q 0 Constant 1 1 byte length 3 1 Address 2 2 bytes length Fig 5 35 2 5 Q S1 Specify the input data that will to be performed by Exclusive OR The address is then begins and the data length is consistent with the length S2 The input data is performed with the one of the Exclusive OR When the format specifying is selected the address the address is then started and the data length is consistent with the length
123. ange end Program end Appendix Two The Usage Guide APPENDIX TWO THE USAGE GUIDE OF LADDER DIAGRAM OF GSK218MC WITH THE DISC MAGAZINE 1 Points for Attention of Using the Disc Magazine 10 During the tool change every operation must be confirmed and then the next operation can be executed Before the magazine positioning sensor confirming the tool advance can t be operated During the tool advance and before completing the magazine motor can t be started and the toolpot can t be rotated Before confirming the tool advance the tool change can t be operated Before the machine spindle reaches the tool change position the tool change can t be operated Before the spindle positioning completes the tool change can t be operated The spindle head can t be moved before the tool change completes and the tool arm returns to the origin When the motor voltage is too high the overload relay should trip firstly to avoid the motor burnt The tool change is firstly executed in JOG mode and then confirm the operations are correct such as the toolcase advance the tool change by the mechanical part and the spindle clamping and releasing the tool finally the operation is controlled by CNC in sequence During debugging only the input and output signals X and Y addresses in the ladder diagram program can be rewritten then the debugging requirements can be completed However to avoid the accident it s bette
124. anned cycle instead of the EOB when the positioning approaches to the drilling and tool retraction each time SPL signal becomes 1 when it is set to 0 which means that it is not performed to the EOB STL and SPL signals are became 0 and stopped when a block is performed Signal address H7 6 5 H4 3 H2 i4 0 we 134 31 T1 l1 IwIjg j I 111 11 5 4 Skip Optional Block Brief In the Auto operation when a slash is specified at the beginning of the block and when the skip optional block signal BDT is set to 1 this block is then ignored Signal The signal of skip optional block BDT G021420 Type Input signal Function Select whether the block with is ignored Motion In the Auto operation the block with is ignored when BDT is set to 1 the program is performed normally when BDT is set to O The detection signal of skip optional block MBDT F004 0 gt Type Output signal Function The state of PLC skip optional block BDT Signal address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 so A ILL 1 1 d I j rr T rr I gp I T 68 Chapter Five Automatical Operation 5 5 Program Restart Brief The program can be restarted the block from the specified sequence number after the tool is damaged or had a rest then stopped This function also can be used for the rapid program detection function Signal The signal of program restart SRN lt G021 6 gt Type Input signal Function Selection program restarts Operation
125. anual of GSK218MC CNC System ADDRESS DEFINITION STATE 0 STATE 1 In the spindle speed mode whether the detection switch is ON the position mode is OFF Whether there is the detection signal in K008 7 spindle position speed mode Whether there is the detection signal for the K009 0 n YES NO spindle position reach signal K009 1 Whether the lubrication pressure or the oil level detection is valid K009 2 Whether detect the air pressure Whether there is the detection switch p K009 3 l YES NO the spindle level detection Whether there is zero return switch in the K010 1 l NO YES magazine Whether select NC type for the magazine Normally K010 2 l NC type zero return switch open type Whether select NC type for the magazine Normally K010 3 l NC type tool advance switch open type Whether select NC type for the magazine Normally K010 4 l l NC type retraction switch open type Whether select NC type for the magazine Normally K010 5 l l NC type counting switch open type Whether setting the magazine origin is valid K010 6 S MUERE NO YES in JOG mode Whether the magazine enters the adjustin mode Whether the spindle tool number doesn t K011 0 display during clamping or releasing the YES NO tool in JOG mode Whether allow to return to the tool change K011 1 SE NO YES position in JOG mode Whether the output is OFF after the K011 2 l l H NO YES magazine advance in position Whether the output is OFF after the spindle K01
126. arm information 1235 The magazine traverse in position is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1236 The magazine zero return is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1237 Zero return should be operated because the magazine origin is lost Reason During the magazine zero return it stops and the alarm occurs due to the abnormal Trouble shooting The magazine is returned to the zero position again About the details refer to chapter II The usage method and maintenance of GSK218MC CNC system with the disc magazine Alarm information 1238 The toolcase level and vertical positions are detected abnormal Reason The toolcase is neither in the level position nor in the vertical Trouble shooting Detect whether the detection signals of X5 1 and X5 2 are normal or not Alarm information 1239 The spindle can t be rotated because the toolcase isn t in the level position Reason The spindle rotation is executed when the toolcase isn t in the level position Trouble shooting The toolcase is returned to the level position which can be detected by the stated of X5 2 and then the spindle rotation is executed Alarm information 1240 Zero return should be operated again due to the magazine abnormal Reason 1 The magazine stops rotating in the time set by T102 and the pulse signal occurs because 240 Appendix Two The Usage Guide the magazine count
127. ase _ GOS3080 RH selection signal of spindle speed command G033 5 Polarity selection signal of spindle soeed command SSIN G033 6 The completion signal of index working table BEUCL G03846 releasing The completion signal of index working table BECLP G038 7 clamping 3 y The allowance signal of the 1 reference position GO5630 H3 detection na iti The allowance signal of the 2 reference position PREF20 PREF23 G05740 H3 detection rd e The allowance signal of the 3 reference position pREE30 PREF33 G05840 H3 detection The allowance signal of the 4 reference position PREF40 PREF43 GO59HO H3 detection 02 Chapter One PLC Interface Display VOLUME Ill OPERATION EXPLANATION S D O o D um 9 le 93 Gr ESE ES Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System a c D O Le D u m O 94 Chapter One PLC Interface Display CHAPTER ONE PLC INTERFACE DISPLAY 1 1 GSK218MC The Automatic Operation in PLC ON PLC operates when the system is turned on the 1 period may use the R510 0 to conduct a period of its network cables the value of the R510 0 is then reset to 0 the user can not output this value The value of the nonvolatile relay is the one of the last output before PLC stops Note The keys inside the in the following explanations are panel buttons the keys inside the is the soft button u
128. ation K011 5 l l ae NO YES signal during the spindle positioning Whether the manipulator Normally K012 0 l l NC type braking signal is NC type open type Whether the manipulator Normally K012 1 NC type tool hold signal is NC type open type Whether the manipulator Normally K012 2 NC type zero signal is NC type open type Whether the toolpot K012 3 Cee tee NO YES detection switch is NC type Whether use the index worktable K012 4 NO YES clamping or releasing device Whether the index worktable K012 5 l NO YES automatically clamps or releases Whether the index worktable K012 6 NO YES enters the working mode K012 7 Whether the manipulator NO YES enters the debugging mode i NC USER SETTING K011 0 Whether X axis uses K013 4 l the zero return switch Whether Y axis uses K013 5 the zero return switch Whether Z axis uses K013 6 l YES NO the zero return switch Whether the 4 axis K013 7 l YES NO uses the zero return switch K015 0 Whether it is the operation panel B NO YES 229 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 230 USER STATE ADDRESS DEFINITION 0 STATE 1 SETTING VALUE magazine control button is valid or not Whether the external magazine K015 7 NO control button is valid or not Points for attention 1 When the system is normally running please make sure K000 0 K000 1 K000 2 K000 3 K000 4 K000 5 K000 6 K000 7 K005 2 K010 7 and K012 7 are 0 othe
129. because the safety door isn t closed 1294 A011 6 The index worktable can t start because it doesn t clamp 1360 A020 0 The lubrication pressure low or the oil level low The alarms of AO0 0 A19 7 are the system red ones After the alarm the system stops running A20 0 A31 7 are the customer self defined blue alarms After the alarm the system continues to run which doesn t affect the normal running The details of PLC alarm diagnosis information Alarm information 1200 The air pressure is detected abnormal Reason Trouble shooting Detect the state of X002 0 Alarm information 1201 The lubrication oil is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1202 The lubrication motor is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1203 The cooling motor is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1204 The chip cleaner motor is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting 195 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Alarm information 1205 The pressure oil pump motor is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1206 The spindle cooling unit is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1207 The machine lamp is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1208 The
130. bi oae dopo bel Sd e Les bete soi deabus 44 9 92 ANDE BIEDVDILDAND U lest tosta b a dida 45 D 94 NOT BIEDyYSDIE NOT ndis ben adds 47 0 00 FORE XCIUSIVS OR c C e e H M 47 CHAPTER SIX THE COMPILATION LIMIT OF THE LADDER DIAGRAM e 49 VOLUME 1 FUNG THON EXPEAINATIGOI 5 32a detuseto dite desadctadeso dete desee todeso de tede tods 51 CHAPTER ONE CONTROLLABLE AXIS iiim its dnte ida 53 1 4 The output or the axis moVeliehl sedet seen arb hacia kde ei eee ea uta 23 1 2 Smo Ready Sida lua di 54 CHAPTER TWO READY FOR OPERATION ade 55 ZI ES A cU MC Au aU us 55 ZZICNG Ovyertavel SIN alitas ita a Go bi do Lad riuond 55 2 9 E Solar PP ica diese dieta opto Ea aeo dee A 56 2 4 Selection of the Operation Method oo oooooocccncccncncnnnoncnananananacanonononocanonononanananaroncncnnnononos 56 AS State OUIDUtL SIgIaluseos HP ERES URDU TAI EN es 57 CHAPTER THREE MANUAL OPERATION 5 inti a i e oS a i e RR Rc 58 3 1 JOG Feed Incremental Feed 000 ccc ccccsssscccccessssceecesessaceeceesssaeeeceesesseeeceesssseeeeeeessaaeeees 58 3 2 MPG Manual Pulse Generator Single Step Feed eee 59 CHAPTER FOUR REFERENCE POSITION RETURN eene 60 4 1 Manual Reference Position Return ooooccnnooonncconnoonnnononanananononannnnoncconananonoconanannnccnnnnnnos 60 4 2 Return to the Reference Position Detection Signal
131. blish 2 4 Function Code Press the Function command soft key in the Fig 2 1 1 then enter the function code operation interface refer to the Fig 2 4 1 Cladder 1 Fa18 Kaas e Fans 2 x001 4 Falo Kags xO 7 Dag FOG 1 R887 5 Dan Ra887 6 Baa e Ra87 7 ABBB 4 Ra88 Baa 6 ABB ABBB 1 KBO6 K BE xOOG e XBaa 3 ROSS e K BS e Fans 1 DATA bh 112653 EUN MERERI PATH 1 HCREATE STPCMD EDIT RETURN Fig 2 4 1 There are 35 PLC function codes are listed in the function code Refer to the Chapter Two Programming for function code format and usage the compilation of the function code is consistent with the ladder diagram operation in the Section 2 3 S D O D um y O 107 Gr WEI Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 2 5 Command Table In the PLCGRA interface as the Fig 2 1 1 Press the Command table soft key again and then enter the command table classification operation interface refer to the Fig 2 5 1 NO REPER 0012 OR STK PATH 1 i i i j The content and operation of the command list 1 3652 Offer the steps and totally steps information of in the current operation of the ladder diagram RUN the operation state of the ladder diagram Input Display the input data MDI mode current working method Conversion Ladder diagram converts to the command list Download
132. by 1 byte Length it is a 4 digit which is shown in the following figure e L Moving digit each time A Moving state Fig 5 20 2 L its range is 0 8 A it is treated as bit parameter it is always shifted when ACT 1 during A 0 and it moves once each period ACT is regarded as the pulse signal when A 1 and when the value turns into 1 from 0 it moves once Output W 1 state does not move out when the W 0 shifting operation is performed 1 state moves out when the W 1 shifting operation is performed 5 21 DIFU Rising Edge Detection Function This code is set the output signal to 1 during the scan period of the input signal rising edge Format ACT H oru DIFU L Pee edge wH Pee Fig 5 21 1 36 Chapter Five PLC Function Code Controllable condition Input signal The output signal is set to 1 at the rising edge 0 1 of the input signal Output signal The output signal keeps to 1 during one scan period of the ladder diagram when the function code is performed Parameter L The range of the rising number is 0 255 The system alarm may occur when another DIFU code or DIFD code is used the same number in the ladder diagram Operation SWINJOA j i a E Performance period ACT T OUT Ld d Fig 5 21 2 y A O Q Q 3 3 Q The system may automatically check the range of the series number of the rising edge as for the repeated series number or the exceed
133. change device 9 When K012 7 1 the manipulator is running without any condition Firstly Z axis returns to the machine zero position and the manipulator can t load the tool otherwise unload the tool in JOG mode The mode only applies to the debugging the manipulator position However the data can t be changed so be caution to use 10 When K015 0 0 use the operation panel of GSK218MC K015 0 1 use the operation panel of GSK990MA Appendix Two The Usage Guide List V Definition of PLC external alarm PMC A ADDRESS ALARM CONTENT ALARM NUMBER 1205 A000 5 he pressure oil pump motor detected abnormal 1206 A000 6 The spindle cooling unit detected abnormal 1207 A000 7 The machine lamp detected abnormal 1208 A001 0 The machine control box temperature detected abnormal 1209 A001 The machine bed temperature detected A abesse 1210 A001 2 The machine vibration frequency detected O a 1211 A001 3 The pressure oil temperature detected O ee 1212 A001 4 The oil pressure too low 1213 A001 5 The machine isn t ready 1214 A001 6 The spindle can t revolve due to the gear BN M 1215 A001 7 T code should be executed before A o e 1216 A002 0 The spindle cant rotate in the tool releasing state 1217 A002 1 The tool can t release during the spindle EUN 1218 A002 2 The magazine stops due to the abnormal P BE er aps 1219 A002 3 The manipulator isn t in the origin and the II a 1220 A002 4 The spindle tool clamping detected 1
134. ck Brief The signal block operation is only enabled to the automatic operation When the single block signal SBK is set to 1 during the automatic operation the CNC enters into the automatic operation and stops after the current block is executed In the sequence automatic operation the CNC enters into the automatic operation and stops after each block in the program is performed The automatic operation is performed again when the single block signal SBK is set to 0 uonounJ Signal Single block signal SBK G021 1 Type Input signal Function Single block enables Operation Perform the single block operation when this signal is set to 1 Perform the normal operation when this signal is set to O Single block detection signal MSBK F004 3 Type Output signal Function PLC single block signal state Motion The signal is set to 1 in the following condition When the single block signal SBK is set to 1 The signal is set to 0 in the following condition When the single block signal SBK is set to O 67 S D uonounJ Gr Miser Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Note 1 The operation in the thread cutting The SBK signal becomes 1 during the thread cutting the operation is stopped after the thread cutting code is performed before the 1 non thread cutting block 2 The operation in the canned cycle The SBK when it is set to 1 signal is stopped during the c
135. clamping time spindle positioning positioning time positioning detection positioning width worktable releasing finish to 0 worktable clamping finish to O worktable releasing detection to 0 The delay time of the index Greater than or equal worktable clamping detection to 0 worktable releasing to 0 worktable clamping to 0 rotation in the JOG mode rotating one tool post rotation in the JOG mode rotating one tool post turret magazine stopping rotating one tool post magazine rotation detection rotating one tool post detection in the turret magazine advance time detection in the turret magazine retraction time AAA advance finish in the turret to O 215 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System NOTE SETTING RANGE INITIAL ADDRESS VALU MES The time delay unit of the tool Greater than or equal retraction finish in the turret to O magazine magazine rotation detection rotating one tool post Setting the time of compelling to Greater than the time of stop the magazine rotation due to rotating one tool post the abnormal Points for attention 1 The above parameter TMR is related to the magazine type about the magazine speed and other performances please refer to the magazine performance for properly setting the parameters 2 When the above parameter TMR setting is not proper the system alarms and the tool change can not be executed normally The ladder diagram matches with the magazine after
136. composed of two parts the 1 level program and the 2 level program which are inconsistent with the performance period The 1 level program performs once each 8ms which can be treated some fast corresponding and short pulse The 2 program performs once each 8 nms N is the partition value of the 2 level program PLC may divide the 2 level program into N parts when the 2 level program is executed It is performed one part for each 8ms The 1 Specify the 1 EOB level program Partition 1 Partition 2 The 2 level program a Partition n Specify the 27 EOB Fig 2 3 1 PLC in the GSK218MC is separately performed in the PLC AVR SCM The 1ms of each 8ms is the communication time for reading the PLC data from the CNC The 5ms is that the PLC gains the system control signal F X and uploads the control result data G Y parameter external port I O PLC is always performed the ladder diagram calculation other than the interruption of the response exchange data Chapter Two Sequence Programming The 45 8ms 8ms 8ms level P The 2 S level c 3 4 Fig 2 3 2 When the last partition value of the 2 level program of the n is performed the program is then executed from the beginning of the program In this case when the partition value is n the performance time of one cycle is 8 n ms The 1 level program performs once each 8ms the 2 level y O Q Q 3 3 Q program performs
137. corresponding byte length Controllable condition Format Reset RST RST 0 Release the resetting RST 1 Reset W 0 Performance code ACT ACT 0 Do not perform the SUB code W keeps invariable ACT 1 Perform the SUB code Parameter Length Data length specified 1 or 2 bytes and the addend specifying method constant or address MERA RST E Bui jidads Jewo bue juejsuoo JO ssaJppe PUSYeIQNS CS ss Jppe jndino jnso4 S Fig 5 31 1 Format Data length specifying specifying 0 Constant 1 1 byte length 1 Address 2 2 bytes length Fig 5 31 2 S1 Specify and store the minuend address S2 The specifying method of the subtractor is determined by Length S3 Specify and output the address of the operation result Output W 0 Normal operation W 1 Abnormal operation The subtraction result exceeds the specified data length W 1 44 Chapter Five PLC Function Code 5 32 ANDF Bit by bit AND Function This code is performed the AND with a constant or the content from the address B from the content of the address A and its result is stored to address C Format ACT EE S1 32 S3 ANDF orma onstant or specifying Address A address B Address C Fig 5 32 1 SWINJOA U A O Q Q 3 3 Q Controllable condition ACT 0 Do not perform ANDF code ACT 1 Perform the ANDF code Parameter Length Specify the data length 1 byte or 2 bytes input th
138. ct our company immediately if the product type is inconsistent with the packing list lack of accessories or damage in transportation m Wiring e The person who attends the wiring and check should have the corresponding professional capacity e The product should be reliably grounded and its resistance should be less than 0 1O and can not be used the neutral conductor zero cable to replace the ground wire e The wiring should be correct and firm otherwise possibly causing the malfunction in product or unexpectable result e The surge absorb diode connected with the product should be linked based upon the described direction otherwise it may damage the product o Before Inserting pulling out the plug or opening the main cabinet of the product it is important to cut off the product s power m Inspection and maintenance Cut off the power before inspecting and maintaining or changing the components Check the malfunction when the short circuit or overloading occurs The computer can be started after the malfunction is eliminated Do not power ON OFF frequently for the product if you want to turn on the power again after power off its interval time is 1min at least Volume Programming Description Introduce the technical specification product type series and parameter configuration command code and program format of 218MC series machining center CNC system Volume Il Function Description Introduce the main function of
139. ctangle shadow means cursor click the left key of the mouse in the figure editing area between two bus cables and select the position where the figure unit needs to be edited Refer to the following figure 000 0 lt 000 1 H SS K005 2 601 3 0 006 0 KAAI f 000 2 000 3 H 88 2 K005 2 Fig 4 3 2 1 When the block is selected press the mouse left key at the beginning position of the block then drag to the end The selected area indicates by the rectangle with dotted line before releasing the left key H 88 0 000 6 K005 2 601 2 3 000 0 lt 000 1 R068 1 K005 2 601 3 0 K006 0 K 006 0 H E XDgg 2 x000 3 RSS 2 K005 2 013 1 OPE K006 1 M Fig 4 3 2 2 The inverted color of the whole ladder diagram after releasing that is the ladder diagram within this rage is selected and the next operation can be performed For example cutting deletion and copy etc H 88 0 000 6 K005 2 6012 3 000 0 x000 1 R0S8 1 K005 2 013 0 i a 006 0 K006 0 x000 2 X000 3 ROSS 2 K005 2 G013 1 K006 1 K006 1 Fig 4 3 2 3 121 S c 3 D O Lo D Q F O 3 c D O Le D D O Gr ES FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 4 3 3 The Editing of the Figure 4 3 3 1 Cutting There are three ways for carrying out this operation after the ladder diagram area to be edited is selected 1 Select the cutting after
140. cted when transferring the system alarm may occur 5 26 MOVB Transmission of 1 Byte Function The MOVB code transfers the 1 byte data to a specified destination address from a specified resource address Pu t de th t d th ransfer the transfer the MOVB resource destination CW address address Figure format Fig 5 26 1 Controllable condition ACT 0 No data transfers ACT 1 1 byte is transferred Parameter 1 Resource address or constant If the S2 is single byte address the S1 should be copied to the S2 address based upon the byte value if S2 is bit address the S1 should be copied to the S2 lower byte address based upon the byte value 2 Destination address 5 27 MOVW Transmission of Two Bytes Function MOVW code transfers the 2 bytes data to a specified destination address from a specified resource address Figure format ACT 81 S2 transfer transfer resource destination address address Fig 5 27 1 40 Chapter Five PLC Function Code Controllable condition ACT 0O No data transfers ACT 1 1 byte is transferred Parameter S1 Resource address or constant S2 Destination address 5 28 XMOV Binary Indexed Data Transmission Function This function code is used to read or write the data from the data table The data number tablecapacity in this table can be specified by address the data table can be operated by PLC based upon the user s setting during operating Format
141. cting the air supply Normally EGER X002 1 XS41 14 Jumping signal Normally pm mm oo mem A X002 2 XS41 Detection of the index table NC contact X001 2 XS40 S 3 D 2 O 5 D o 152 Chapter Three The Machine Control I O Interface ADDRESS SIGNAL INTERFACE DEFINITION CONTACTS PIN releasing NEM 3 mm ___ of the index table NENNEN contact clamping X002 4 The external Normally clamping releasing tool open contact control X002 5 XS41 5 The tool releasing Normally AI Moacen ope eanet X002 6 XS41 18 The tool clamping Normally a a A X002 7 XS41 The detection switch of the Set by ae a RP X003 0 XS41 The editing lock Normally me me IO Nm aant X003 1 XS41 21 The operation lock Normally m e Undefined X003 5 XS41 e Undefined S X003 7 XS41 Undefined X004 0 XS42 The handhold unit enable Normally e i dE A X004 1 XS42 The spindle gear 1 Normally pU a ee eee X004 2 XS42 2 The spindle gear 2 Normally a e opera X004 3 XS42 15 The spindle gear 3 Normally pr Eton aene X004 4 XS42 Undefined BERN X004 5 XS42 5 Detecting the safety door Normally promet mmn annm X046 xs 18 Udemd X47 Xs 6 Undefined X50 xs 8 Undefined X005 1 XS42 21 The magazine advance Set by AAA ems X005 2 XS42 The magazine retraction Set by emos X005 3 XS42 22 The magazine CW CCW Set by mm mm AS S D lt 2 O D O e O 153 Cr IS Instal
142. d Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System CHAPTER FOUR REFERENCE POSITION RETURN 4 1 Manual Reference Position Return Brief The machine tool moves along with the specified direction and returns to the reference position by setting the parameter No 7 3 7 in the mode of the manual reference position return The selected axis from the panel buttons is only indicated the one of the specified zero return and it is regardless of the axis move The following signals are related with the manual reference position return Table 4 1 1 Manual reference position return Deceleration signal of reference position return DECX DECY DECZ DECA End signal of reference position return ZP1 ZP2 ZP3 ZP4 Signal End signal of reference position return ZP1 ZP4 F016 5 0 F016 3 Type Output signal Function This signal shows that the machine tool has been held in the reference position of the controllable axis These signals are one to one corresponding with the axes Table 4 1 2 End signal of reference position return along with X axis End signal of reference position return along with Y axis End signal of reference position return along with Z axis End signal of reference position return along with A axis Output condition The signal becomes 1 when the following states are displayed e The manual reference position return has been completed and its current position is performed in the in position area e The automatical reference posi
143. d again 1241 A005 1 The magazine tool advance detection abnormal 1242 A005 2 The magazine tool retraction detection abnormal 1243 A005 3 The magazine zero position setting is valid 1244 A005 4 For the magazine safety the tool change stops due Bolle to the abnormal 1245 A005 5 There isn t the code tool number or the number is BN ee 1246 A005 6 The tool advance can t be executed in the magazine e aceite teteerge pt 1247 A005 7 The tool advance can t be executed in the magazine A ne copo 1248 A006 0 The tool retraction cant be executed in the e Bie magazine when the toolis released 1249 A006 1 The tool advance can t be executed because the II A 1250 A006 2 Feeding cant be executed because the spindle doesn t comply with the current tool number in the magazine 1251 A006 3 owitch off the power supply 1252 A006 4 Z axis can t move during the tool clamping 193 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System PLC alarm AADDRESS INFORMATION number 1253 A006 5 Caution to operate the magazine adjusting mode 1254 A006 6 The cycle start can t be executed in the magazine adjusting mode 1255 A006 7 The tool can t return to the origin 1256 A007 0 The tool change position can t be returned because A a o 1257 A007 1 The tool change position can t be returned because II M 1258 A007 2 The tool change position can t be returned because IA E 1259 A007 3 The tool cant be changed due to T code tool BN EE 1260 A007 4 T
144. d position mode Y006 5 XS23 Zero speed clamping Points for attention 1 About the connection method and points for attention of PLC output Y address please refer to chapter IV 2 During using the ladder diagram the user can add the new function into the undefined input but it requires to rewrite the ladder diagram so be caution to operate List III The address definition of KAPA USER STATE ADDRESS DEFINITION 0 STATE 1 SETTING VALUE parameters K000 1 Whether allow to debug PLC signals O O K000 2 Whether clear all Y Elgials when NO PLC enters the debugging mode 226 Appendix Two The Usage Guide USER STATE ADDRESS DEFINITION STATE 1 SETTING E Whether allow to edit K000 3 A address information Whether allow to edit K000 4 K address information Wheth llow to edit K000 5 d NO YES X address information Wheth llow to edit K000 6 bis ROM EC NO YES Y address information Whether allow to operate K000 7 the command list K001 0 Whether allow to use the magazine da Maia K001 1 Mcd auomauca yy coals NO YES during switching the ladder diagram Selecting th indl K001 2 E Ld abd 24v valid Ov valid interface input signal level Whether use the gear control K004 0 d Ni NO YES I O point for spindle Whether only one axis is controlled l K004 1 l u Many axes One axis in the reference point in JOG mode Whether the machine K005 0 Eo NO YES is with the external MPG Whether th chine K005 1 BR od NO Y
145. ddress Amber 1 6 54 3 2 10 Fig 3 6 1 Note When PLC address K005 2 71 PLC enters the debugging mode All of the external alarms are cancelled and the machine interlocking signals are then cancelled the tool change code can not be performed The parameter can be modified only when comprehending the parameter so that the damage in the machine tool or injury of the person may occur 3 7 Information Display Request Address A This address area is reset when the system is turned on Its definition type INT8U totally 32 bytes Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 49 I AO A1 Chapter Three PLC Address 3 8 Counter Timer C This area is used for placing the current count value of the counter The data is reset after the system is turned off Its definition type 128 addresses euin oA 3 9 Counter Preset Value Address DC This address area is used for storing the counter preset which is a nonvolatile storage area that is the memorized content may not loose even the system is power off Its definition type 128 addresses The setting value of the DC is only read instead of writing 3 10 Timer Address T JU A O Q Q 3 gt Q This address area is used for storing the current numerical value of the timer The data initial is presetting value after the system is power off Current data is presetting value when it is set to O Its definition type 128 addresses 3 11 Presetting Value Address of the Timer DT
146. de Miscellaneous Function Brief When the S code is performed the I O point or analog value control can be set by the bit 2 of the bit parameter No 1 The basis processing of the spindle S code I O point control Table 7 2 1 Program F add uuu Output signal Response address dcm 1999 signal ER mo SRESP FIN GOOZO function 22 007 f 2 G63 1 SFIN GOO A T2 Chapter Seven M S T Function S code miscellaneous function explanations are shown below 1 It is supposed that SX is specified in the program The range of the X is 1 8 the system may alarm if it exceeds its range S1 S8 separately corresponds to the F address signal F22 0 7 For example S1 corresponds to the F address signal F22 0 2 If the non M S and T codes such as the movement and dwell are specified with the miscellaneous function at the same time the miscellaneous function is then simultaneously performed 3 When the S1 is performed the F address signal F22 1 and the strobe signal F007772 are set to 1 simultaneously ensuring the PLC sets the response signal RESP G063 1 to O 4 PLC is set the end signal SFIN G00Z4 and FIN G00 0 to 1 when the operation is performed If these code miscellaneous functions namely M S and T are performed simultaneously the end signal FIN GOO 0 can be set to 1 till all of these functions are executed 5 When the S1 is completed ensuring the PLC is set the response signal SRESP G63 1 to 1 6 M
147. dress 2 2 bytes length Fig 5 33 2 Length Specify the data length 1 byte or 2 bytes input the data format constant or address S1 Specify the input data that will to be performed by NOT The address is then begins and the data length is consistent with the length S2 The input data is performed with the one of the OR When the format specifying is selected the address the address is then started and the data length is consistent with the ength S3 It is used for storing the address of ORF operational result The result from the ORF is stored from this address and the data length is consistent with the one of the length For example When the address A and B have the following data which are shown below Awes AA OOO ti adresse 0 9 1 T9 T1 T9 1 The operational result of the ORF is shown below ELA LA IATA ALA 46 Chapter Five PLC Function Code 5 34 NOT Bit by bit NOT Function This code is reversed to each content in address A and store the result to the address B ACT Length NOT format S1 32 TP Address A Address B specifying Fig 5 34 1 Format SWINJOA Controllable condition ACT 0 Do not perform the NOT code ACT 1 Perform the NOT code y A O Q Q 3 3 Q Parameter Length Specify the data length 1 byte or 2 bytes R d specifying 1 1 byte length 2 2 bytes length Fig 5 34 2 S1 The input data is reversed bit by bit The address is started
148. dress number and bit number and its number is as shown below Address number rules Address number consists of address type address number and bit number X 000 6 Type Address number Bit number Address type X Y R F G K A D C and T Address number Decimal number means one byte Bit number Octonary number system 0 7 are separately indicated the bytes 0 7 bits in the front of the address number The address type of the GSK218MC PLC is shown below Table 3 1 R Intermediate relay 512 bytes INTSU EE Data register 0 255 INT16U The data register of the counter INT1GU preset value Counter 0 127 INT16U PLC alarm detection INT8U Timer 0 127 INT16U The data register of the timer preset INT1GU value Keep relay 64 types INT8U INT8U data type is 8 bit character type without symbol INT16U data type is 16 bit integral type without symbol 3 1 Machine PLC address X The X address of the GSK218MC PLC composes of two types 1 The X address is assorted with the three I O input terminals namely X840 XS41 and XS42 2 The X address is assorted with the input button on the MDI panel of the system 3 1 1 X Address on the I O Input The addresses 48 addresses are defined as INT8U from XO to X5 which are distributed on the three I O input terminals for example X840 XS41 and XS42 euin oA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q euin oA D a O e y
149. during the spindle stopping Alarm information 1218 The magazine stops due to the abnormal and then the tool number should be confirmed again Reason Txx code is executed during the magazine rotating the system alarms or reset key is pressed the alarm occurs Trouble shooting 1 The magazine zero return can be operated again 2 Reset the spindle tool number and the magazine tool number C About the details refer to chapter II The usage method and maintenance of GSK218MC CNC system with the disc magazine Alarm information 1219 The spindle rotation can t be operated because the manipulator isn t in the origin Reason The spindle revolution is executed while the manipulator isn t in the origin Trouble shooting 1 The manipulator returns to the origin whether the manipulator is in the origin or not is detected by the state of X3 4 2 The diagnosis can be conveniently operated when the abnormal occurs during the manipulator running The manipulator can operate positioning in the mechanical zero position when the manipulator isn t in the origin the mechanical zero return should be operated before positioning C About the details refer to chapter II The usage method and maintenance of GSK218MC CNC system with the disc magazine 237 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Alarm information 1220 The spindle tool clamping is detected abnormal Reason When the tool is clamped Y2 0 0 the m
150. e Chapter Three Operation The signal of spindle analog value control Gp GR2 GR3 FO34 0 2 gear selection z S End signal of axis returning to the 1 ZP11 ZP14 FO41 0 3 reference position na End signal of axis returning to the 2 7P21 ZP24 FO42 0 3 reference position E ra End signal of axis returning to the 3 7P31 ZP34 FO43 0 3 reference position End signal of axis returning to the 4 Z7P41 ZP44 F04440 3 reference position i na The detection signal in the 2 reference F045 0 position along Z axis n ra The detection signal in the 3 reference AQ2 FO45 1 position along Z axis MEE S D uonounJ M Register signal of M code M S T function The detection signal in the 4 reference F04542 position along Z axis UOO00 UO015 F054 F055 User macro program output signal U100 U131 F056 F059 The established reference position signal ZRF1 ZRF5 F06020 4 The arrival signal of the required ESEND FO61 1 component The performance signal of axis returning ZRFJ4 ZRFJS F06142 6 to the reference position 89 Gr ESE ES Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System The following parameters are performed at the A speed and in the accuracy mode High speed card scan counter OT Pulse accumulation along the 1 axis r F301 high speed card Pulse accumulation along the 2 axis of F302 high speed card Pulse accu
151. e Debugging Parameter diagnosis the input state on the system side STATE X3 1 X3 0 ADDRESS PIN NO X 41 21 XS41 8 X3 0 the external editing lock X3 1 the external operation panel lock The system parameter number 0 5 9 LEDT LOPT LOPT 1 Use the external operation panel lock 0 Not use the external operation panel lock LEDT 1 Use the external editing lock 0 Not use the external editing lock 4 13 Cooling Lubricating and Chip Removal Control o Relative signals M08 Coolant is ON M35 The chip removal function is ON e Signal diagnosis Parameter diagnosis The output state on the machine side STATE YO0 1 ADDRESS PIN NO XS43 14 YO 1 the cooling switch control Parameter diagnosis the machine side output state STATE Y1 1 ADDRESS PIN NO X 43 21 Y1 1 the chip removal switch control e About the internal circuit refer to the following figure 4 13 1 System sag UE ULN2803 S D lt 2 O D O e O 24V MO8 internal circuit Fig 4 13 1 175 S j D 2 O D o Cr IS Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 4 14 Setting the Relative Feedrate The system parameter number 0 112 FDR RDR TDR RFO LRP RPD RPD 1 Before connecting the power supp
152. e Fig 2 2 1 PLCGRA ladder 1 Fa18 Kags e Fans e Fa1a8 Kags XBBb 7 Kag7 5 Fag1 1 ABB Kags e Fans 1 Ra887 6 Baa e Kaas 2 Fans 1 Ra87 7 000 4 Kaas e Fans 1 Ra88 Baa 6 Kaas e Fans 1 000 xOGG 1 Ra888 1 Kags e Fans 1 KGa xOOG e Baa 3 Ra88 e K BS e Fans 1 Fig 2 2 1 PLCGRA ladder01 KOOS e Fans 2 G81 XBa1 4 Fa1a a ABBb 7 Kag7 5 Fag1 1 000 K as 2 Fans 1 Gale Ra887 6 Baa e Kaas e Fans 1 Gale n R887 7 Baa 4 Kaas e Fabs 1 Gale 1 Ra88 Baa 6 Kags e Fans 1 Gale 1 000 008 1 Ra88 1 Kan5 e Fans 1 5013 Kago K GE Ba e Baa 3 Ra88 e K BS e Fans 1 S D O D mm o RETURN The basis codes are displayed as follows 4 F Normally opened contact 4 Normally closed contact Output coil O Output coil reverse Horizental breakover cable Vertical breakover cable e Delet the vertical breakover cable Miscellaneous soft keys gt Pagedown 4 Pageup 104 Chapter Two PLC Programming Operation Return Return to the last menu 2 3 The Operation Explanation of the Ladder Diagram e Add component positioning the cursor to the place where the component is needed to be added input the component name in according to the corresponding menu the display is then appeared after the data the corresponding components can be added pressing the INPUT key on the
153. e data format constant or address Format Data length specifying specifying 0 Constant 1 1 byte length 1 Address 2 2 bytes lenght Fig 5 32 2 S1 Specify the input data that will to be performed by AND The address is then begins and the data length is consistent with the Length S2 The input data is performed with the one of the AND When the format specifying is selected the address the address is then started and the data length is consistent with the length 93 It is used for storing the address of ANDF operational result The result from the ANDF is stored from this address and the data length is consistent with the one of the Length For example When the address A and B have the following data which are shown below Address A TT Ta Ta TO JO T9 TAI Address B 0 1 0 1 0 7 0 1_ The operational result of the ANDF is shown below Mecress o 1 oto fo foto ft 45 euin oA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q 5 33 ORF Bit by bit OR Function This code is performed the OR with a constant or the content from the address B from the content of the address A and its result is stored to address C Format Length S2 ORF format S1 Constant or S3 specifying Address A address B Address C Fig 5 33 1 Controllable condition ACT 0 Do not perform the ORF code ACT 1 Perform the ORF code Parameter mag Format Data length specifying specifying 0 Constant 1 1 byte length 1 Ad
154. e following case e The corresponding axis has been moved The signal turns into O in the following case e The corresponding axis has been stopped The signal of the axis movement direction MVD1 MVD4 F019 0 F019 3 Type Output signal Function These signals are indicated as the movement direction of one controllable axis MVD1 The movement direction of X axis MVD2 The movement direction of Y axis MVD3 The movement direction of Z axis MVD4 The movement direction of A axis Output condition 0 indicates the corresponding axis moves along with the negative direction 1 indicates the corresponding axis moves along with the positive direction S D uonounJ Note These signals are kept invariable during stopping which indicates the axis movement direction before stopping Signal address H7 6 5 H4 3 2 H1 0 e MONOS POMO ION Ma ee I AOS OOO IO Mc il E 53 Gr Miser Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 1 2 Servo Ready Signal Signal Servo ready signal SA CF00076 Type Output signal Function SA signal turns into 1 after the servo is ready As for the axis that with brake the brake is released when the signal is outputted It is braked when this signal does not output Signal address 7 6 5 H4 3 2 1 0 roof o dese T 0 j Y S D uonounJ 54 Chapter Two Ready for Operation CHAPTER TWO READY FOR OPERATION 2 1 ESP Brief The machine immediat
155. e hardware limit measure should be adopted meanwhile and the limit switches of each axis in positive and negative directions should be installed About 218MC integration system the user can monitor and check the state of the emergency stop input signal through checking NO 1444 ESP on X signal software interface of the diagnosis interface After pressing the emergency stop button all the air switches of the system must be OFF As to 218MC H 218MC V check NO 23 5 MT emergency stop In JOG or MPG mode each coordinate axis is moved slowly to testify the validity of each axis overrun limit switch the overrun release button and the correctness of alarm display The system alarms when the overrun occurs or the emergency stop button is pressed while press the overrun release button and the axis moves oppositely the system can release the alarm The emergency stop signal 218MC parameter diagnosis The input state on the system side Sate X1 4 address Pin NO XS40 24 218MC H V parameter diagnosis the input state on the system side State X23 5 address Pin NO Remark The situations occur in the system 0251 the emergency stop alarm please check whether the state of X1 4 is 1 in 218MC system while check X23 5 in 218MC H V system However it s not allowed to ignore the emergency stop alarm by the bit parameter NO 61 5 which may result some functions can t be used n
156. e numbers should be suitable from the 41 EMT y A O Q u 3 gt Q euin oA U A O Q Q 3 3 Q setting of the Length format This address is defined as D register S4 Storage address of the table number It is used to store the table number to be read or write It occupied bytes should be suitable for the specifying in the Length If the setting of the table number is more than the data registered in the S1 it outputs W 1 in a wrong way Actual transmission address head address table number the table number is 0 S1 1 The actual transmission address can not be exceeded the data list Output When the value in the table number exceeds the S1 W 1 the read or write of the data table does not perform W 0 without error W 1 with error 5 29 DSCH Binary Data Index Function This function code can be use for indexing the binary data in the data table The data number table capacity in the data table can be specified by address In this case the table capacity still can be changed even if the program is written into ROM Format A cS ES Bui jidads zewo y bua7 ssoJppe oDeJojs ssoJppe peou ejep indino jjnsaJ xepul o re y P Q SE D Q RV O e Q F lt ssoJppe ejep xepul Fig 5 29 1 Controllable condition Detection repetition REP REP 0 Perform DSCH code start to search it from the first address of the data table it will not co
157. e of K signal for example 0060 means 63 7 0637 means 63 7 from top to bottom is from 0060 to 0637 that is to say K signal is from 6 0 to 63 7 the sequence can t be changed Space is normally 5 spaces the other words can t be added 6 A signal A0 0 The Code and Meaning of A31 7 Format Axxxx space Chinese note line break Enter Such as A0000 Air pressure is detected abnormal Among them xxxx means the value of A signal for example 0000 means 0 0 0317 means 31 7 from top to bottom is from 0000 to 0317 that is to say A signal from 0 0 to 31 7 the sequence can t be changed Space is normally 5 spaces the other words can t be added 7 End End Symbol 264 Remark The above information must be rewritten to the top about the details please refer to LadChixx txt the internal file in the system The only difference in the corresponding English file LadEng01 txt is that Chinese note is changed into 32 English words or characters
158. eT Rm D243 The current tool post It can t be set D245 The spindle tool number Points for attention 1 The setting value of D100 must be less than 100 and its setting value must be same as that of CTR100 otherwise the abnormal occurs For example When D100 16 D001 D016 in the data list are valid When D100 24 D001 D024 in the data list are valid 2 DOOO only displays the spindle tool number and the spindle tool number can t be rewritten in D000 the spindle tool number should be rewritten in D245 3 The value of D241 can t be rewritten 4 D240 D247 are used by the system and they are not user defined 5 About the detailed introduction please refer to part 3 List VII Definitions of CTR parameters PRESET ADDRESS 7 CURRENT VALUE FUNCTION VALUE C50 3 The current steps of the The manipulator manipulator operation operation counting in JOG mode C100 24 The current tool case number The magazine counter DE O eee Points for attention 1 Setting value of CTR100 must be less than 100 and its setting value is same as that of D100 otherwise the abnormal occurs For example CTR100 16 the tool case number of the magazine is 16 CTR100 24 the tool case number of the magazine is 24 232 Appendix Two The Usage Guide List Vl Definitions of M codes M CODE F SIGNAL FUNCTION REMARK M0 F0s1 7 Pogamdwl Moi F034 oons M0 Foos Programend ws Foo Smdeow 0 0000 Spindle CCW
159. east one circle to find the position When the motor is OFF directly twist the motor rotor or the spindle connecting the motor rotor for one more circle it is suggested that the user directly twist for the convenient operation 5 Adoptthe above method to twist the motor for one more circle and adjust gradually the motor spindle rotor can position on the positioning point After the operation the absolute position of E 0 the rotor can be observed or other numerical value is displayed on the monitoring window The value is recorded in the parameter PA58 and saved that is the position 260 Appendix Two The Usage Guide E Zio For example If is displayed on the monitor window the numerical value 213 is input into the parameter PA58 The magazine tool change position coordinate is set in the system data parameter 0052 the parameter must be set correctly otherwise the accident may happen causing the mechanical part damage Through the above operation of three steps the tool change can be executed correctly and the operation of executing T and M codes is described as below Program 1 TXXM6 Program 2 TXX G54 G90 X100 Y100 Machining program M6 The tool change effect of above two programs are same The following program format is wrong T1 T2 M6 4 Adjusting in JOG mode after the magazine stopping due to the abnormal During the manipulator running power off occurs or the emerge
160. ected abnormal the pulse signal occurs 2 When the magazine is rotating the magazine counting switch is O or 1 which exceeds the time set by T103 Trouble shooting 1 The output of the magazine CW or CCW rotation Y3 0 and Y3 1 is abnormal 2 The magazine counting switch is abnormal 3 Reset the values of T102 and T103 About the detailed operation please refer to Chapter II The usage method and maintenance of 200 Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram GSK218MC CNC system with the turret magazine Alarm information 1241 The magazine tool advance is detected abnormal Reason When the magazine is executed the tool advance movement Y3 2 1 in the time set by 1104 the magazine tool advance detection switch X5 1 isn t operated Trouble shooting 1 Detect whether the magazine tool advance detection switch is normal or not 2 Detect whether Y 3 2 is output 3 Adjust the time set by T104 again Alarm information 1242 The magazine tool retraction is detected abnormal Reason When the magazine is executed the tool retraction movement Y3 3 1 in the time set by 1105 the magazine tool advance detection switch X5 2 doesn t operate Trouble shooting 1 Detect whether the magazine tool advance detection switch is normal or not 2 Detect whether Y 3 3 is output or not 3 Adjust the time of T105 again Alarm information 1243 Set the magazine zero position as valid Reason When the magazine is not with the zero
161. ed And the connection diagram is shown as below The connection diagram of cables is shown as below RS232 COM1 COM2 Socket of 9 pins in type D Fig 2 3 1 2 4 Connection between MPG and Handhold Unit 2 4 1 Interface Signal Diagram 218MC system can be equipped with MPG or handhold unit in difference type or non difference the interface signal is shown as below X 22 DB26 female plug HBt 19 LED 2 HB 19 20 3 HA AlVCOM 4 HA GND gt Espa 5 HY 15 23 HY 6 HZ 16 24 HU UH 25 H 1 H 10 a YDDo 26 H 100 9 ESPI Fig 2 4 1 1 144 Chapter Two Connection between Equipments 2 4 2 Introduction of Interface Signals HA HA HB and HB with MPG in different type or handhold unit pulse signal with MPG of non difference type or handhold unit HA HB with 5V HA with MPG A HB with MPG B ESP1 and ESP2 Emergenoy stop signal of handhold unit HX HY HZ and HU They are respectively the axis selection signals of X Y Z and AM H 1 H 10 and H 100 They are respectively the override signals of MPG pulse equivalent VCOM Common port of handhold unit The connection diagram of 218MC with the internal MPG is shown as below DB26 male welding Cold press terminal Built in X522 handwheel Pin Signal Signal 18 5V 3 HAt TN VCC 1 HB dE 10 OV HY
162. ed binary data is transferred to the destination address Format of the figure Length S1 S2 transfer the transfer the MOVN new byte resource destination W number address address ACT p Controllable condition ACT 0 No data ACT 1 the byte specified by the quantity is transferred Fig 5 25 1 Parameter Length the byte numbers or data number to be transferred S1 Resource start address or constant Select the transfer form based upon the S1 1 If the S2 is single byte address S1 is the constant the resolution of the S1 based upon the byte is copied to the address where it is corresponding Length type at the beginning with S2 the S1 should be evaluated based upon the bit if S2 is the bit address the bit address corresponding Length begins with the S2 address 2 The address type both S1 and S2 will not be considered whether it is matched which is transferred the data by the byte address 2 Destination start address 39 SWINJOA J A O Q Q 3 gt Q For example ACT Fig 5 25 2 1 When S1 is regarded as constant 5 and the S2 is treated as R60 then R60 00000101 R61 00000101 2 When S1 is regarded as constant 5 and the S2 is treated as D60 then D60 5 D61 5 3 When S1 is address D50 and S2 is treated as D60 then D60 D50 W 1 the specified quantity bytes are transferred W 0 No data transfer The quantity range that exceeds the parameter type is dete
163. edly used The system may automatically check the range of the sequence of the timer It may alarm when the sequence number is repeated or exceeded its range 5 14 CRT Binary Counter Function The data in the counter are binary system which have the following functions based upon the applications 1 Presetting counter If the count reaches to the output signal of presetting value preset the numerical value 2 Ring counter When the counter reaches to the presetting value it inputs the count signal and resets the initial value and performs the count again 3 Addition and subtraction counter This is treated as the forward backward counter which can be used both addition and subtraction 4 The selection of the initial value The initial value can be regarded as O or 1 29 Format SWINJOA Fig 5 14 1 Controllable condition Specify initial value CNO CNO 0 counter begins with O CNO 1 counter begins with 1 Specify rising or descending counter UPDOWN UPDONW 1 subtraction counter UPDOWN O addition counter Reset RST RST 0 release the reset RST 1 reset W resets to 0 and the counter value reset to initial value The RST is set to 1 as long as the reset is required ACT 1 Count performs when ACT is at the rising edge ACT 0 Counter does not operate W will not change y A O Q Q 3 3 Q Parameter COUNTER Specify the number of the counter which is indicated by xxx it expresses
164. eface Your Excellency It s our pleasure for your patronage and purchase of this GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System made by GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd This manual ts the part of the Installation and Connection which is introduced the installation and connection and the PLC programming method of the machining center CNC of the GSK218MC In order to guarantee the product is operated with a safe normal and effective situation it is necessary to carefully read this manual before installing and using this product Chinese version of all technical documents in Chinese and English languages is regarded as final Preface and Precaution Security Precaution A Accident may occur by improper connection and operation This system only can be operated by authorized and qualified personnel Please carefully read this manual before using Especially prompt The power installed on inside the main cabinet is a special one offering by our company CNC system Never attempt to use for other purposes by this power Otherwise huge hazard may occur M Warning Notice and Explanation Statement e In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all various matters However we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done or which cannot be done because there are so many possibilities Therefore matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as impo
165. efined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1205 The pressure oil pump motor is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1206 The spindle cooling unit is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting 235 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Alarm information 1207 The machine lamp is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1208 The machine control box temperature is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1209 The machine bed temperature is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1210 The machine vibration frequency is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1211 The pressure oil temperature is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1212 The oil pressure is too low Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1213 The machine is not ready Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1214 The spindle revolution can t be operated due to the gear abnormal Reason When the spindle is executing the revolving codes the spindle gear is detected abnormal Trouble shooting When the spindle is in gear I Y3 4 1 the gear I in position detection switch X004 1 is OFF in the time set by T0021 adjust the time of T0021
166. egister DT 0 127 word Subprogram P 0 99 Mark L 0 99 Input signal of NC side F 0 63 byte Signal outputs to the NC side G 0 63 byte I O module 0 63 byte 0 47 byte 1 2 The Concept of the Sequence Programming The programming is performed a logic control to the machine tool and its relative equipments which is called sequence programming After the programming is converted into some kind of format CPU can be performed the code and calculation treatment for it and its fruits can be memorized to RAM CPU can be rapidly read each code stored in the memory which can be performed the programming according to the calculation operation The compiling of the sequence programming starts with developing of the ladder diagram euin oA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q euin oA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q 1 3 Distribution Interface Step one The interface can be distributed after confirming the controlled object and calculating the points of the corresponding input output signal Refer to the Chapter Four input output interface signal table in the part of the Installation and Connection when distributing the interface 1 4 Ladder Diagram Programming Step two The control operation required by the machine tool can be expressed by the ladder diagram with the on line compiling of the GSK218MC The functions such as the timer and counter can not be expressed by relay symbols which can be i
167. ely stops by pressing the ESP button on the operation panel of the O m Red machine tool ESP button Fig 2 1 The button is locked after pressing the releasing methods are differing from the manufactures Usually the button can be released by left rotation Signal ESP Signal ESP G001 0 Type Input signal Function The machine immediately stops after inputting the ESP signal Function The CNC is reset and in the ESP state when the ESP signal becomes 1 Signal address e gy og jd j jj i9 2 2 CNC Overtravel Signal S D uonounJ Brief The limit switch operates and the tool decelerates and stops when the tool movement exceeds the stroke end set by the machine tool limit switch the overtravel alarm is then displayed Signal Overtravel signal L1 L5 G012 0 G012 4 L1 L5 G013 0 G013 4 Type Input signal Function It indicates the controllable axis has been reached to the stroke limit Each direction of each controllable axis has this signal The and are expressed the direction of the signal name the digit is corresponding with the controllable axis L 1 the X axis overtravel 2 the Y axis overtravel 3 the Z axis overtravel 4 the 4 axis overtravel 5 the 5 axis overtravel overtravel overtravel 55 S D uonounJ Gr Miser Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Operation When the signal is 0 the operations of the cont
168. ensation point 256 number of X axis screw pitch error 166 Chapter Four Machine Debugging P226 The compensation interval of 10 X axis screw pitch error P231 The compensation override of X axis screw pitch error 0 1 2 3 127 Setting a ee point 0 7 6 4 2 Machine coordinate AAA Y system Setting value Mesias en 10 000 20 000 30 000 Mi NE vatum 0 9 993 20 006 29 996 1269 998 Fig 4 7 2 Set the compensation value in screw pitch error X in offset List 4 7 4 pa A EC CI IES ESA COMPENSATION 7 4 AMOUNT The setting method of Y and Z axes are same as above 4 8 Mechanical Zero Return Machine Zero Return 1 The concept of mechanical zero point machine zero point The machine coordinate system is the fixed one on the machine And the origin of the machine coordinate system is called as the mechanical zero point or the machine zero point In this manual it is also called as the reference point and always installed in the maximum limit of X Y and Z axes After the machine is designed manufactured and adjusted the machine is set up and fixed However after CNC power on there isn t the mechanical zero point and the zero point is obtained in AUTO or JOG mode There are two types of zero return 1 with one turn signal 2 without one turn signal which are set by bit parameter NO 6 6 During zero return if there isn t one turn signal in the motor zero mode type i
169. ent cabinet The power supply must be connected with the earth properly Various sockets should be connected and the screw should be fixed tightly and the joints of cables are not allowed to plug and pull after power on During installing CNC system the panel should not be scratched by the hard object and the edge iron CNC system should be taken off during painting to keep the panel clean Around CNC system it should be free of the strong current the ferromagnetic interference source and keep far away from the inflammable the explosives and the various dangerous objects 130 Chapter One The System Configuration and Installation 1 3 CNC System Installation Dimension Figure User installation and machining digram a Y eS hus A pe LA Y Rd m Ea E mi y Y 1 S M4 i 320 EE aml y IN le A m g EU LE LU m y at i 6 03 f El B LJ 5 z 00 Ig a T8 E i e g t6 s s NI e N P on t rol CU U l de ZINE ul l E CU O Se D Y de x o E 4
170. er the index T0038 5000 worktable releasing detection The delay time after the index T0039 5000 worktable clamping detection The delay time after the index T0040 Mv 4000 worktable releasing finish The delay time after the index T0041 D 4000 worktable clamping finish The turret magazine rotation T0100 2000 delay time 1 in the JOG mode The turret magazine rotation T0101 2000 delay time 2 in the JOG mode Setting the delay detection time T0102 2000 of the turret magazine dwell Setting the delay detection time T0103 3000 of the turret magazine rotation Setting the delay T0104 detection time of the 5000 turret magazine tool advance Setting the delay detection time T0105 5000 of the turret magazine retraction The time delay unit of the T0106 e turret magazine advance finish 209 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System USER INITIAL ADDRESS NOTE SETTING VALUE ms VALUE ms The time delay unit of the turret T0107 Ven magazine tool retraction finish T0108 Setting the delay Recon une 3000 of the turret magazine rotation 2 Setting the time for compelling to stop when the magazine rotation abnormal occurs List VI Definitions of DATA parameters DEFINITION NOTE USER SETTING VALUE DO00 Display the spindle No setting tool number D001 Tool number 1 D098 Tool number 98 DM OOO The tool number The tool number of T code T code Noseting Noseting AUR current N
171. ervo with the electrical gear ratio function the electrical gear ratio of the system is set as 1 1 and the calculated electrical gear ratio is set into the digit servo If the step drive is required try to select the drive unit with the step subdivision function select the mechanical transmission ratio properly and try to set the system electrical gear ratio as 1 1 so the big difference between the numerator and the denominator of the electrical gear ratio can be avoided Example 2 The formular of the gear ratio of the rotation axis NxCx4 1x2500x4 P 360x1000xreduction ratio driving passive tooth G 4 5 Backlash Compensation The dialgauge the micrometer gauge or the laser can be used to measure the backlash compensation should be compensated to improve the machining precision Therefore measuring the lead screw backlash in MPG or single step mode is not recommended and the following method is suggested e Editing a program 00001 N10 G01 G91 X1 F800 N20 X1 162 Chapter Four Machine Debugging N30 X1 N40 X 1 N50 M30 e The backlash error compensation value is set as O before measuring e In the running program of a single block find the measuring datum A after positioning two times record the current data run 1mm in the same direction and then run 1mm to point B in opposite direction finally read the current data Opposite m direction Readt data position Fig 4 5 1 Measur
172. et DAPO3 parameter PA15 as 1 Data parameter The linear acceleration and deceleration time constant of the spindle and tapping axis set by P298 is rewritten to 300 Data parameter During tool retraction the time constant of the spindle and tapping axis set by P302 is rewritten to 300 After switching into the position mode when the spindle speed doesn t comply with the command speed the data parameters P323 and P326 can be rewritten or DAPO3 parameters PA12 and PA13 can be rewritten by the formula P G N C 4 to obtain the electrical gear ratio P The pulse number of input codes G The electrical gear ratio N The number of the motor revolution C The photoelectric encoder pulse 179 S 3 D 2 O 5 D o o Cr Wx Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 10 When the gear ratio of the spindle and the motor isn t 1 1 the corresponding gear ratio should be calculated and input into PA35 and PA36 parameters of DAPO3 11 The spindle CW and CCW rotation should comply with each other during rigid tapping And the fluctuation of revolution speed should not be too much its better to keep in three revolutions 12 About cutting some soft material such as the aluminum alloy and the copper etc it s better to use the tapping in spiral type with the dedicated coolant to get better effect B Setting the flexibility tapping The system default parameter can be used and only the following
173. et to 1 in the MDI mode Input Input data display MDI mode Current working mode Return Return to the previous menu gt Enter to the next page The set value can be downloaded to the CNC operation pressing the lt Save gt key after modifying CTR downloading successful displays after the save is performed the system displays downloading fail when the save is incorrect the illegal downloading parameter displays without downloading conditions 114 Chapter Three PLC Address and Parameter Setting Note It only can be saved and operated by pressing the Save key after modifying The search and positioning can be performed by the pageup pagedown and four direction keys on the panel checking and modifying of the counter address can be performed 3 5 M function corresponding to the F address Press the gt soft key in the Fig 3 1 entering the next page press the MDEC soft key entering the checking and setting interfaces of the M function corresponding to the F address refer to the Fig 3 5 1 MOODE ADR REMARK Dr MOS we M07 Mag FO3L 1 Selt et M10 DATA Rd 11 29 30 PATH 1 E lt RETURN Fig 3 5 1 The content and operation of the M function corresponding to the F address MCodeDEC It indicates MDEC interface RUN The operation state of the ladder diagram MCODE M function number ADDR F address setting Input the password higher than the terminal user whic
174. etween different vertical lines in the same row one of row does not consecutively connect to the vertical line As for this case the system can not be treated and therefore the system alarm occurs The upper embossment can not be accepted inside the network that is the parallel network generates on several nodes on one certain row and any row of it can not be connected to this parallel network The system alarm may issue This is regarded as syntax error and the system alarm may occur which is as follow AAA H T F pra Fig 6 1 49 euin oA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q Gr ESE ES Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System SWINJOA ES A O Q Q 3 gt Q 50 Chapter One Controllable Axis VOLUME Il FUNCTION EXPLANATION c o D mI O F O 5 Gr ESE ES Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System S D uonounJ 22 Qr WEE Chapter One Controllable Axis CHAPTER ONE CONTROLLABLE AXIS 1 1 The output of the axis movement Brief The movement state of each axis can be output to the PLC Signal Axis movement signal MV1 MV4 F017 0 F017 3 Type Output signal Function These signals are indicated that one controllable axis is being moved MV1 X axis is being moved MV2 Y axis is being moved MV3 Z axis is being moved MV4 A axis is being moved Output condition The signal turns into 1 in th
175. even if this signal is set to 1 The detection signal of miscellaneous function MAFL F004 4 Type Output signal Function This signal indicates the state of the miscellaneous function lock signal Output condition The miscellaneous function lock signal AFL is 1 when this signal is set to 1 The miscellaneous function lock signal AFL is 0 when this signal is set to O S D Signal address 7 6 5 4 3 H2 H1 0 uonounJ TI S D uonounJ Gr ESE ES Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System CHAPTER EIGHT SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 8 1 Spindle Speed Control Method Brief GSK218MC divides the spindle into gear spindle and analog spindle based upon the control method 1 In the gear spindle the CNC controls the spindle speed by which the S code turns into switch value and then outputs to the spindle 2 In the analog spindle the CNC controls the spindle speed by which the S code turns into analog value and then outputs to the spindle The I O point or analog value control can be set by bit 2 of bit parameter No 1 8 1 1 Gear Spindle Brief The gear spindle means that the spindle S code is controlled by I O Signal Spindle speed strobe signal TF F007 2 Gear spindle address signal F22 0 F22 7 Type Output signal Function These signals have been indicated that the specified spindle speed function has been performed actually Output condition Refer to the S code miscellaneo
176. for Operation 2 5 State Output Signal Cutting feed signal CUT F002 6 Type Output signal Function This signal indicates that it is being performed the automatical cutting feed Output condition The signal is set to 1 in the following conditions In the automatical cutting feed linear interpolation arc interpolation helical interpolation thread cutting skip cutting or cutting in the canned cycle Notice 1 This signal does not output when the feed is in the dwell state 2 This signal can be outputted during interlocking or the federate is O Signal address 7 6 5 H4 3 2 1 0 eo pero j j o S D uonounJ s Gr Miser Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System CHAPTER THREE MANUAL OPERATION 3 1 JOG Feed Incremental Feed Brief JOG feed The feed axis and direction selection signal on the operation panel is set to 1 in the JOG mode The machine is consecutively moved along the selected axis in its direction Incremental feed The feed axis and direction selection signal on the operation panel is set to 1 in the incremental feed mode The machine moves one step along the selected axis in its direction the least distance of the machine movement is the least input increment each step has the least input increment with 10 100 or 1000 folds JOG feed and incremental feed are absolutely same other than the feed distance selection method In JOG feed the machine can be consecuti
177. g mode 4 Note of GSK218MC CNC System with the Disc Magazine Macro Program O91000 Program name G65 H81 P10 Q 1000 R1 Miscellaneous lock machine lock transfer to N10 when spindle tool number T code program end G69 G50 G15 G80G40 M50 Tool change begins and detect whether the condition of tool change is satisfied or not otherwise the system alarms M19 G00 G91 G49 G30 ZO Spindle positioning return to the tool change coordinate point M22 The manipulator operation begins N10 M51 Tool change end M99 Program end 262 Appendix Three The Allocated File Format of the Ladder APPENDIX THREE THE ALLOCATED FILE FORMAT OF THE LADDER DIAGRAM The following information is saved in the form of signals in sequence in the ladder diagram allocated file LadChixx txt xx corresponding to the running ladder diagram file number set by the system 1 M Code M00 Meaning of F Signal in M99 Format Mxx space Fyyyy space Chinese note line break Enter Such as MOO F0317 program dwell Among them xx is 00 01 02 99 from top to bottom totally 100 digits and the sequence can t be changed Space normally is one space the other words can t be added yyy y means the value of F signal corresponding to M code for example F0317 means F31 7 from 0260 to 0337 can be set from signal 26 0 to 33 7 if it is set as 001 it means it can t be registered and the system doesn t identify t
178. gnal LSYS G016 7 Detection signal of zero return deceleration P G01 7 0 4 A AXIS1 AXIS2 Edtmode JA 322 9 GO2080 Auto mode AJ J J Oc A y GO0201 MDImde JX y O GO2082 Zero return mode 3 2 GO2083 Single step mode A AJ4Ab amp k GO20844 Manualmode o A A4 GOO MPG mode X A OOH DNC mode o JJ HT Ske J J L AJ 9 J 02H Single block 1 32 GORRA Dryrun J O O MSTlck J O GO210S3 Machinelock 1 1 1 GO2MHM4 Selection stop A 3 3 O GO215 Program restat o A GO2186 Spindle positive GO2280 Spindle stp 1 3 0 Spindle negative 1 3 ADc GO2282 Spindle override 218MC all in one machine 1 1 GO2283 Spindle override cancellation Z GO2284 Spindle override 218MC all in on machine 1 11 GO2285 Spinde JOG O a6 Tunnel selection signal o 3 GO2287 Lubrication 2 2 O GO2380 Cooling 3 J49J J 2JI GO0233 Chpremva O GO2382 Cycle stat 1 1 O GO2386
179. gnals is shown as fig 3 2 1 1 Machine side CNC side Fig 3 2 1 1 S D lt 2 O D O e O 151 Cr IS Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 3 2 2 The Interface Definition of the Input Signals The definitions of each pin of the input interfaces are show as the following list List 3 2 2 1 ADDRESS SIGNAL INTERFACE DEFINITION a ea Misal 1 The limit signal of X axis in NC contact DO all el X000 1 XS40 14 The limit signal of X axis in NC contact A ee X000 0 XS40 X000 2 XS40 The limit signal of Y axis in NC contact positive direction 2 15 The limit signal of Y axis in NC contact negative direction X000 4 XS40 17 The limit signal of Z axis in NC contact ee awa X000 5 XS40 The limit signal of Z axis in NC contact meme ot eededa oo 5 X000 6 XS40 18 The limit signal of the 4 NC contact axis in positive direction X000 7 XS40 The limit signal of the 4 NC contact e PP T ed X001 0 XS40 X axis zero return NC contact jme HP menace X001 1 XS40 21 Y axis zero return NC contact EN Z axis zero return NC contact memo X001 3 XS40 22 The 4 axis zero return NC contact meme eene oo X001 4 XS40 24 The emergency stop NC contact EN T gation X001 5 XS40 12 The external cycle start Normally mme mm ooo e X001 6 XS40 25 The external feed hold Normally me mm a e X001 7 XS40 13 The lubrication pressure or Normally pe m o ee X002 0 XS41 1 Dete
180. h can be modified in the MDI mode the system should be restarted again after modifying MEANING M function explanation Input Input data display MDI mode Current working mode Return Return to the previous menu 4 Enter to the previous page S D O D um y O This interface is used for registering and deleting of the M code F signal is set to the one unique corresponding M code the M code that does not set by the F signal is disabled The corresponding F strobe signal may be sent based upon this list when M code is performed then start the corresponding ladder diagram network The system alarm occurs after modifying the prompt content is Cut off the power and its setting is enabled after the system is restarted The setting of the M function in PLC program its corresponding M code is desired to be used after the corresponding address is modified the ladder diagram is then modified It is necessary to operate carefully so that the machine may be damaged or the injury accident may occur The search and positioning can be performed by the pageup pagedown and four direction keys on the panel the M function corresponding to the F address can be checked or modified 115 Gr Miser Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Note 1 M00 M03 M04 and MOS can not be changed because they are occupied by the system Note 2 The file numbers of the ladder diagram and configurat
181. he cycle start can t be executed during returning to II AS 1261 A007 5 The tool retraction can t be executed when the tool BN NE M 1262 A007 6 Excess the safety position 1263 A007 7 MOG can t be executed because the magazine isn t A e 1264 A008 0 Switching the spindle speed mode into the position o a n 1265 A008 1 Switching the spindle position mode into the speed ee a a 1266 A008 2 The gear change cant be executed during the BN E 1267 A008 3 The magazine advance and retraction detection II O 1268 A008 4 The signal detection is abnormal during the spindle mo t meedcamiged 8 0 1269 A008 5 The spindle orientation time sequence detection BN a aa 1270 A008 6 The tool change can t be executed because Z axis ermano po 1271 A008 7 The magazine revolution is abnormal so it is compelled to stop 1273 A009 1 The magazine can t advance because the toolpot is A normes o 1274 A009 2 The magazine cant advance because the toolpot qme isnt in position 1288 A011 0 The index worktable releasing detection abnormal 1289 A011 1 The index worktable clamping detection abnormal 194 Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram PLC alarm A ADDRESS INFORMATION number 1290 A011 2 The index worktable clamping device doesn t start 1291 A011 3 The index worktable can t revolve because it doesn t release 1292 A011 4 The index worktable can t move because it doesn t clamp 1293 A011 5 The cycle start can t be executed
182. he input signal address instead of using the R address is treated as the sampling of the trigger signal 2 Mode The trigger mode inputs the specified trigger signal Rising edge The rising edge sampling of the trigger signal specifies the signal state Falling edge The falling edge sampling of the trigger signal specifies the signal state Any change Specify the signal state by the rising or falling edge sampling of the trigger signal Switch on Sample the specified signal state when the trigger signal is switched on Switch off Sample the specified signal state when the trigger signal is switched off Enter the PLCTRACE trace interface by pressing the trace soft key Refer to the 1 2 5 2 SAMPLING MODE TIME CYCLE 5 RESOLUTION B ms TIME manapn apnnmnpn a1328 ms 3 5063 7 D E d C Ld 5 E e o Zn oi le umm gt 8 START T STOP DATA 11 48 31 PATH 1 Setting START STOP RETURN Fig 1 2 5 2 The content and operation of the PLCTRACE trace interface 1 Sampling mode Display the current sampling mode of the system 2 Period Display the current sampling period of the system that is resolution 3 Time This parameter displays when the sampling mode selects the periodic cycle Format display when tracing the current timing is at the left side and the max allowance timing is at the right side
183. he previous position of the objective one 3 Count the position number at the objective previous position or the steps at the objective previous position 33 euin oA D a O e y 3 3 e Format CNO Q O O O W O la oT O o a od po So DIR O 3 x9 qug SS9o lg amp 2go 2 58 oS gN 300 v Sg o y O 5 POS os o 9 53 oe o no INC ACT Fig 5 19 1 Controllable condition Specify the initial number of the rotary table CNO CNO 0 counter begins with 0 CNO 1 counter begins with 1 Check whether the short path can be selected the rotation direction DIR DIR 0 do not select the selection direction is only positive DIR 1 select the selection direction can be divided into positive or negative Specify the operation condition POS POS 0 counting objective position POS 1 the previous position of the counting object Specify the position numbers and steps INC INC 0 counting position number Specify INC 0 and POS 1 if the previous position of the objective one is to be calculated INC 1 counting steps Perform the code ACT when the code INC 1 and POS 0 if the distance between the current position and the objective one is to be calculated Performance code ACT ACT 0 do not perform the ROT code W is without change ACT 1 perform the ROT code Generally set the ACT 0 if the operation is to be required set the ACT 1 Parameter S1 Supply the rotary position number S2 Supply the
184. he program codes After the bit parameter NO 4 3 is set as 0 zero return can be operated by G28 because detecting the limit block is equivalent to the mechanical zero return in JOG mode Remark 1 If there isn t the mechanical zero point in your CNC machine please don t use the mechanical zero return operation 169 S j D Q O 5 5 D o o S j D 2 O D o Cr Wx Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Remark 2 After the mechanical zero point completes the indicator of the corresponding axis is ON Remark 3 When the operator uses some axis taking from the mechanical zero point the indicator is OFF Remark 4 About the mechanical zero point the reference point direction please refer to the manual of the machine manufactory o Relative signals DECX Deceleration signal in X direction DECY Deceleration signal in Y direction DECZ Deceleration signal in Z direction DECA Deceleration signal in the A axis The parameter diagnosis the input state on the machine side STATE X1 3 X1 2 X1 1 X1 0 ADDRESS PIN NO XS40 22 XS40 09 XS40 21 XS40 08 State parameters No 001 JR SJZ SJZ 1 The reference point memory memory 0 The reference point memory not memory The system parameter number ojoje MaoB zPLs ZPLS 1 Zero return mode selection with one turn signal
185. he system the G63 0 G63 1 and G63 2 are the answer signal inside the system separately performed by M S and T 3 4 CNC gt PLC Address F The addresses from FO to F63 are defined as INT9U totally 64 bytes Refer to the Chapter Two Function for details 3 5 Internal Replay Address R The address area is reset when the system is turned on R510 and R511 are used by the system Its definition type is INT8U totally 512 bytes Address number ee e 9 2 1 0 NA ee es System program administration area R510 The signal of R510 0 address is set to 1 when PLC starts and restarts which is used the signal set by the initial user The R510 0 is reset to O after the ladder diagram is performed once 15 R511 System timer The following four signals can be used for system timer 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Always cut off Always power on euin oA 104ms ON 96ms OFF 200ms period signal 504ms ON 496ms OFF 1s period signal Fig 3 5 2 3 6 Nonvolatile Relay Address K y A O Q Q 3 3 Q This address area is used for nonvolatile replay and PLC parameter setting This area is called nonvolatile relay area namely the content inside the register will not lose even if the system is turned off K000 K005 are used by the system which is used to protect the PLC system parameter it is very convenient for user to control PLC in the CNC system Its definition type INT8U totally 64 bytes A
186. he tool on the spindle and set D245 as O Alarm information 1250 The tool advance can t be operated because the spindle tool number doesn t comply with the current tool number in the magazine Reason The tool advance in the magazine is operated when Z axis is in the tool change position the tool number of the spindle and that of the current tool case in the magazine are different Trouble shooting The tool number of the current tool case in the magazine is the same as the spindle tool number by rotating the magazine Alarm information 1251 Please switch off the power supply Reason After rewriting the parameter can become valid until the system is restarted Trouble shooting Restart the system Alarm information 1252 Z axis can t move when the tool is clamped 202 Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram Reason Z axis is moved when the magazine is in the tool advance position and the tool is clamped Trouble shooting 1 The magazine is in the tool retraction position 2 The spindle tool is released Alarm information 1253 Caution to operate the magazine debugging mode Reason When K010 7 is set as 1 the alarm occurs The alarm only reminds the magazine enters the debugging mode and the alarm and the interlock signal relative with the magazine are released completely Therefore caution to operate otherwise the abnormal causes the mechanical damage Trouble shooting Press reset key to clear the alarm
187. he tool releasing Normally A Maecen openee X002 6 XS41 18 The tool clamping Normally ee encina X002 7 X841 The spindle tool detection Set by omm ta remet X003 0 XS41 Editing lock Normally pee mno toy PT merit X003 1 XS41 Operation lock Normally ee X32 xs 9 Und E O ENE xosa xs 2 Unemd xos xs 12 unene x56 xsu 25 Une de rw 184 Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram ADDRESS SIGNAL INTERFACE DEFINITION CONTACT o seteeTon xoos7 X94 3 Undemned X004 0 X942 1 The handhold unit enable Normally pd furo o menti emnt X004 1 XS42 14 The spindle gear I Normally a a AN encinas X004 2 XS42 2 The spindle gear II Normally A AN X004 3 XS42 15 The spindle gear III Normally BEN AA xooaa X9 WV Undefined X004 5 XS42 5 The safety door switch Normally pe mE teen op emae X046 X9 18 Udemd X004 7 X942 6 Undefined EN X005 0 X942 8 Undefined DENN X005 1 XS42 21 The magazine advance Set by AAA pene X005 2 XS42 The magazine retraction Set by A prat X005 3 XS42 22 The magazine CW CCW Set by um o asimnsodun permet X005 4 X942 24 The magazine zero return Set by pe me m ee pane X005 5 X942 12 The current toolpot tool Set by pue me Maso reme X056 X542 25 Undemed X57 xs 19 Unmeed X006 0 X922 5 The external MPG X axis Normally BEEN I X006 1 X922 23 The external MPG Y axis Normally pret mE men encina
188. his M code In Chinese note there are maximum 32 words which can be combined by 16 Chinese characters or the Chinese characters words in the equal amount The followings are same Line bread means the end of this line the following words can t be identified The followings are same 2 75 in a Single Line Meaning Saving M Code Information End 3 X signal X0 0 The Code and Meaning of X6 7 Format Xxxxx space Chinese notetline break Enter Such as X0000 X axis positive limit signal Among them xxxx means the value of X signal for example 0000 means 0 0 0067 means 6 7 from top to bottom are from 0000 to 0067 X signal is from 0 0 to 6 7 and the sequence can t be changed Space normally is 5 spaces the other words can t be added the followings are same 4 Y Signal Y0 0 The Code and Meaning of Y5 7 Format Yxxxx space Chinese note line break Enter Such as YOOOO Z axis band type break Among them xxxx means the value of Y signal for example 0000 means 0 0 0057 means 5 7 from top to bottom is from 0000 to 0057 that is to say Y signal is from 0 0 to 5 7 the sequence can t be changed 263 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 5 K signal K6 0 The Code and Meaning of K63 7 Format Kxxxx space Chinese note line break Enter Such as K0060 Whether X axis only use one limit switch Among them xxxx signal means the valu
189. ic Line Control Function COM specifies the control until the coil working within the public end code COME range The system may alarm if the public end code does not specified Format SWINJOA The performance range of the COM command y A O Q Q 3 3 Q Fig 5 17 1 Controllable condition When ACT 0 the coil within the specified range is cut off without any condition W 0 When ACT 1 it is same as the COM code that does not perform any operation Note 1 Do not specify another COM code within the range of one COM code Note 2 When the ACT 0 of the COM the coil within the specified range WRT NOT is set to 1 at any time WRT NOT 1 Note 3 i function codes such as JMPB END1 END2 CALL CALLU LBL SP SPE COM and COME can not be used between COM and COME otherwise the system may alarm 5 18 COME Concentric Line Control End Function This code is specified the controllable range of the concentric control line code COM which can not be used separately it must be used with COM together Format Fig 5 18 1 5 19 ROT Binary Rotation Control Function It is used for the revolving control such as the tool post and rotation workpiece The code is with some functions refer to the following 1 Select the revolving direction with the short path 2 Count the steps from the current position to the objective one or count the steps from the previous position of the current one to t
190. ication OFF Unit min Setting the time of T0017 A 10 lubrication ON Unit sec Setting the detection time T0018 DE 2000 delay for the spindle positioning T0019 The spindle inch time delay unit 2000 T0020 The program iau 10 time delay unit The time delay detector T0021 10000 of the spindle gear I The time delay detector T0022 10000 of the spindle gear II The time delay detector T0023 10000 of the spindle gear III The detection time of switching between the 10000 spindle speed position mode Time of completing executing M29 valid without the 4000 detection signal Time of completing itioning in th indl poxi ioning in Sapin e 1500 position mode valid without the detection signal The time of completing executing M28 valid without 2000 the detection signal The detection time of switching between the 10000 spindle position speed mode T0029 The spindle brake time 5000 T0030 The spindle gear 1 the delay 2000 T0024 T0025 T0026 T0027 T0028 249 Or 41 Bx I ADDRESS T0031 T0032 T0033 T0034 T0036 T0037 T0038 T0039 T0040 T0041 T0100 T0101 T0102 T0103 T0104 T0105 T0106 T0107 250 Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System NOTE INITIAL USER SETTING VALUE VALUE ms time of gear change without the detection switch NEN The spindle gear 2 The delay time of gear change without the 2000 detection switch The spindle gear 3 The delay
191. ich gains the actual feedrate GSK 218MC H and GSK 218MC V CNC system Code detection signal of the feedrate override G011 3 G011 7 Type Input signal Function The cutting feedrate rate signal has five binary system code signals corresponding with its override So the override can be selected based upon the unit of the 10 within the range of the 0 200 Note The feedrate both 218MC H and 218MC V are controlled by the feed brand switch 6 3 Override Cancellation Brief The feedrate override is fixed on 100 by the override cancellation signal Signal Override cancellation signal OVC G024 1 Type Input signal Function The feedrate override is fixed on 100 Operation The CNC operation is shown below when the signal is set to 1 The feedrate override is fixed on 100 regardless of the feedrate override signal No affection in the rapid traverse override and spindle speed override Signal address 7 6 5 4 3 H92 1 0 SL AE 71 S D uonounJ Gr ESE ES Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System CHAPTER SEVEN MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION 7 1 M Code Miscellaneous Function Brief M code miscellaneous function When the registered M code is operated the register signal F026 0 F033 7 and the strobe signal are sent to the PLC PLC is started or cut off its relative functions by these signals Basis processing These signals are used for the following functions Table 7 1 1 Program Output signal
192. ine abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting 203 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Alarm information 1259 The tool can t be changed because T code tool number is abnormal Reason Before executing M06 code the wrong T code is executed The wrong T code is In the tool list D001 D099 there isn t the tool number specified by T code or the number specified by T code is repeated Trouble shooting After executing the correct T code M06 code is executed Alarm information 1260 The cycle start can t be operated during the tool change in JOG mode Reason The alarm occurs when K011 1 1 the tool change is valid in JOG mode and press start button in AUTO MDI or DNC mode Trouble shooting Set K011 1 as O Alarm information 1261 The tool retraction can t be operated in the origin Reason The tool retraction in the magazine is executed when the magazine is in the tool advance position and Z axis isn t in the origin Trouble shooting Z axis returns to the origin and then the tool is retracted Alarm information 1262 The tool exceeds the safety position Reason During moving Z axis Z axis exceeds the position of the tool change when the magazine is in the tool advance position Trouble shooting Z axis is moved and Z axis coordinate is set between the tool change position and the origin position Alarm information 1263 MO6 can t be executed because the magazine hasn t bee
193. ine MMLK FOO4 1 Detection signal of single block MSBK F004 3 Auxiliary function lock signal MAFL F004 4 Detection of manual reference position MREF F004 5 return Detection signal feed override CFORD FOO5 0 cancellation Detection signal of spindle override CSORD F0051 cancellation otrobe signal of M code miscellaneous FOO7 0 function Strobe signal of S code miscellaneous NE NM F007 2 code Strobe signal of T code miscellaneous oT FOO7 3 code System type _ selection signal CNCS S D uonounJ 88 Appendix 0 218MC H V 1 218MC integration NO Sees Performance signal of syntactic detection SCHK F01021 Spindle speed arrival signal F011 0 Spindle speed detection signal F011 1 The completion signal of spindle COIN F011 2 orientation Liss completion signal of speed position VPO F01143 End signal of axis zero point return ZP1 ZP5 FO16 0 4 Axis movement signal MV 1 MV5 FO17H0 4 System controllable number 1 AXIS 1 FO18 0 System controllable number 2 AXIS2 F01821 System controllable number 4 AXIS4 F018 2 System controllable number 8 AXIS8 FO18 3 Axis movement direction signal MVD1 MVD5 FO19H0 4 The 4 axis index worktable releasing BUCLP FO20 0 signal The 4 axis index worktable clamping BCLP FO20 1 signal Gear controllable signal of spindle I O SCODE1 SCOD F022 point E5 F026 F033 The address can be registered in M register table refer to the Section 3 5 in th
194. ing method of the backlash e The backlash error compensation value The data recorded by point A the data recorded by point B The calculated data are input into the corresponding system parameters Data A The data of dial gauge in Point A Data B The data of dial gauge in Point B Pulse equivalent 1 micrometer Remark 1 The backlash compensation amount of each axis is set by data parameters P190 P193 Remark 2 The mode of backlash compensation amount and the compensation frequency are set by data parameters P195 P198 Remark 3 To guarantee the machine precision the backlash can be detected again after the machine is unused for three months The system parameter number 0 1 8 RVCS RVIT RVIT 1 When the backlash is greater than the gap allowance value the next block is executed after the compensation is completed 0 When the backlash is greater than the gap allowance value the next block is executed before the compensation is completed RVCS 1 The compensation mode of the backlash up and down speed 0 The compensation mode of the backlash the fixed frequency 163 S 3 D 2 O 5 D o o S C 3 D 2 O D o Cr Wx Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 4 6 Setting the Drive Unit If the machine traverse direction isn t compliance with that required by the position movement code the position parameter NO 3 1
195. ing range the system alarm may occur 5 22 DIFD Descending Edge Detection Function This code outputs 1 signal of one scan period when inputting the signal descending edge Format ACT L US DID US number w Fig 5 22 1 Controllable condition Input signal The output signal is set to 1 at the descending edge 1 0 of the input signal Output signal The state in the output signal keeps one scan period of the ladder diagram when this function code is performed Parameter L The range of the descending edge number is 0 255 The system alarm may occur when another DIFU code or DIFD code is used the same number in the ladder diagram Operation Performance period ACT our oo ok Fig 5 22 2 The system may automatically check the range of the series number of the descending edge as for the repeated series number or the exceeding range the system alarm may occur 37 euin oA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q 5 23 COMP The Comparison of the Binary Number Function Compare the dimensions of two binary number data Specify the enough bytes to store the input data and comparison data in the memory block iud Length S1 input S2 COMP format data comparison CW specifying address data address Fig 5 23 1 Format Controlled condition ACT 0 Do not perform the COMP code W value is invariable ACT 1 Perform the COMP code Parameter Length Input the specified format con
196. ing switch X3 5 is detected 2 Detecting the magazine counting switch as 0 or 1 exceeds the time set by T103 during the magazine rotating Trouble shooting 1 The output Y3 0 and Y3 1 of the magazine CW or CCW rotation is abnormal 2 The magazine counting switch is abnormal 3 Reset the values of T102 and T103 About the details refer to chapter II The usage method and maintenance of GSK218MC CNC system with the disc magazine Alarm information 1241 The toolcase vertical direction is detected abnormal Reason When the toolcase vertical movement Y3 2 1 is executed the toolcase vertical direction detection switch X5 1 doesn t operate in the time set by T104 Trouble shooting 1 Detect whether the toolcase vertical direction detection switch is normal or not 2 Detect whether Y 3 2 is output or not 3 Readjust the time of T104 Alarm information 1242 The toolcase level direction is detected abnormal Reason When the toolcase level movement Y3 3 1 is executed the toolcase level direction detection switch X5 2 doesn t operate in the time set by T105 Trouble shooting 1 Detect whether the toolcase level direction detection switch is normal or not 2 Detect whether Y 303 is output or not 3 Readjust the time of T105 Alarm information 1243 The magazine zero position setting is valid Reason When the magazine is without zero return switch K010 1 0 the system alarms when K010 6 1 and reminds setting the magazine zero
197. ion should be consistent when the system is performed the ladder and configuration files The data after modifying are stored to the configuration file of corresponding current ladder diagram file number User should compile its significance of the signal in this configuration file so that the system can be correctly displayed the modified information from the user The Chinese note name of the configuration is LadChixx and the English note name is LadEngxx 3 c D O Le D y O 116 Chapter Four The User Explanation of the Ladder Diagram Software EDIT CHAPTER FOUR THE USER EXPLANATION OF THE LADDER DIAGRAM SOFTWARE EDIT 4 1 Brief At present the GSK218MC system supports the compilation software of the configured GSK ladder diagram The compilation software of the GSK ladder diagram is a ladder diagram editor on the PC machine of the GSK218MC and machine center CNC which mainly offers the functions such as the edit conversion debugging and printing of the GSK218MC series ladder diagram This software can be used in the Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows 2003 4 2 Software Introduction 4 2 1 Software Start The compilation software of the GSK ladder diagram is a green one without installing which includes two files Lad Edit Exe and Diag mea and one folder LadFile The Ladder01 file in the LadFile folder is the standard ladder diagram of the system The sof
198. is in the common tapping canned cycle The CNC needs to detect the rotation direction signal of the spindle ensuring the direction and processing of the cutting feed during the rigid tapping during performing G74 and G84 Performance processing opindle rotates Z axis feed tapping sending the MO5 stop code to spindle after the spindle is absolutely stopped sending a reverse code Z axis retracts to the start spindle stops The corresponding ladder diagram should be compiled for carrying out the rigid tapping inform the rotation direction of the CNC external spindle Signal Rigid tapping signal RGTAP G003 t 1 Type Output signal Function That this signal informs PLC has been in the mode of the rigid tapping Output condition RGTAP 1 It is rigid tapping mode at present 0 It does not tapping mode at present Signal address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 cos poo po P 80 Chapter Nine Programming Code CHAPTER NINE PROGRAMMING CODE 9 1 User Macro Program Brief It is very essential to perform the same operation repeatedly for the subprogram but the variable arithmetic calculation logic operation and condition branch an be used for the user macro program function which is very easy to develop the current program The machining program can be called the user macro program by a simple code as the calling of the subprogram 00001 Main program name Subprogram customized M61 N10 G50 X100 Z10
199. is with the gear change device The spindle speed speed Normally mode position position mode open Whether the spindle positioning detection is normally open type S O NC type reaching detection switch is NC type In the spindle speed mode whether the detection switch is ON It s OFF in the position mode Whether there is a detection signal during switching between the ON YES spindle position speed mode for the spindle position reaching pressure or oil level NO Whether there is a detection switch rotation motor overload E arm motor overload si the cooling motor overload with the zero return switch Selecting the magazine Normally zero return switch contact open type Selecting the magazine tool Normally NC type type O Y Y Y Y Y Y N Appendix Two The Usage Guide STATE ADDRESS DEFINITION 0 STATE 1 VALUE advance detection switch contact open type IN Selecting the magazine tool Normall K010 4 c A Y NC type retraction detection switch contact open type Whether setting the magazine origin l l K010 6 l Invalid Valid in JOG mode is valid or not Whether th azine K010 7 ales NO YES enters the debugging mode Whether remind the spindle tool number during clamping or YES NO releasing the tool in JOG mode Whether allow to return to the tool K011 1 POM NO YES change position in JOG mode K0114 aa cut off ane output NO YES after the spindle positioning finish Whether output CW rot
200. ition and the tool number of the spindle is different with that of the current toolcase in the magazine 242 Appendix Two The Usage Guide Trouble shooting Rotating the magazine to make the tool number of the current toolcase in the magazine same as that of the spindle Alarm information 1251 Please switch off power supply Reason The parameter becomes valid after restarting the system Trouble shooting Restart the system Alarm information 1252 Z axis can t be moved during the tool clamping Reason Z axis traverse is executed when the manipulator is in the tool hold and the tool is clamped Trouble shooting 1 The manipulator is in the origin 2 The spindle tool is released Alarm information 1253 Caution to operate the magazine debugging mode Reason When K010 7 is set as 1 the alarm occurs The alarm only reminds the magazine enters the debugging mode the alarms and interlock signals relative with the magazine are released completely so be caution to operate otherwise the abnormal may cause the mechanical part damage Trouble shooting Press reset key to clear the alarm Remark Clearing the alarm doesn t mean the system isn t in the magazine debugging mode K010 7 is O to exit the magazine debugging mode Alarm information 1254 Cycle start can t be executed in the magazine debugging mode Reason Set K010 7 as 1 pressing start button in Auto MDI or DNC mode causes the alarm Trouble shooting Set K010
201. ition return G30 has been completed and its current position is performed in the in position area The detection of the reference position return has been completed and its current position is performed in the in position area The signal becomes 0 when the following states are displayed The detection allowance signal G57 G58 and G59 of the reference position is set to O e The machine tool moves from the reference position e The ESP signal occurs The servo alarm generates 4 3 Area Detection Signal Area detection signal AQ1 AQ3 F045 0 2 Type Output signal Function This signal shows that the machine tool has been held in the area range of the controllable axis These signals are one to one corresponding with the axes Table 4 3 1 Detection signal of the 2 reference position area along with Z axis Detection signal of the 3 reference position area along with Z axis Detection signal of the 4 reference position area along with Z axis Output condition When the machine tool position is within the area of the stored stroke check 1 Data parameter P66 P75 is set the boundary and without the area of the stored stroke check 2 Data parameter P76 P85 or program code can be set this boundary the signal is then turned into 1 otherwise it turns into O Signal address HT H6 H5 4 3 2 H 1 HO DLL es S sor esas oz beer pex 62 Chapter Four Reference Position Return S D
202. l change can t be operated during the spindle tool releasing Reason When the spindle is released Y0 2 1 MO6 or M50 code is executed Trouble shooting The spindle tool is clamped Y2 0 0 Alarm information 1231 The tool change can t be operated because the toolcase isn t in the level position Reason When the toolcase isn t in the level position MO6 or M50 code is executed Trouble shooting The toolcase is returned to the level position Alarm information 1232 The magazine rotating in position is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1233 The magazine rotation motor is overload Reason The motor overload occurs because the mechanical part gets stuck during the magazine 239 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System rotation motor running or the current is too much Trouble shooting Check whether the mechanical part of the magazine rotation motor is normal or not after checking the overload protection switch of the mechanical magazine rotation motor is turned on again Alarm information 1234 The manipulator motor is overload Reason The motor overload occurs because the mechanical part of the manipulator arm gets stuck during running or the current is too much Trouble shooting Check whether the mechanical part of the manipulator is normal or not after checking the overload protection switch of the manipulator arm motor is turned on again Al
203. l output is hold 2 After executing M3 M4 code M3 M4 is valid and hold MO5 signal doesn t output 4 10 The Spindle Automatic Gear Change Control o Relative signals Y3 4 Y3 6 The spindle automatic gear change output signal X4 1 X4 3 The spindle gear change in position signal When the spindle frequency conversion 0 10V analog voltage output controls the system can support the spindle automatic gear change control in three gears and the gear change in position detection function in three gears The signal diagnosis The parameter diagnosis the output state on the system side STATE Y3 6 Y3 5 Y3 4 ADDRESS PIN NO X844 25 XS44 12 XS44 24 Y3 4 the spindle gear I output Y3 5 the spindle gear II output Y3 6 The spindle gear III output The parameter diagnosis the input state on the machine side STATE ADDRESS PIN NO XS42 15 XS42 02 XS42 14 172 Chapter Four Machine Debugging X4 1 the spindle gear I in position X4 2 the spindle gear II in position X4 3 the spindle gear III in position e The control parameters State parameters 0 0 1 SPT SPT 1 The spindle control type I O point control 0 The spindle control type frequency conversion or other mode Data parameters No 246 2 14 6 The maximum speed corresponding to gear 1 When the spindle is in gear I the maximum speed is the spindle one when the
204. lation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System ADDRESS SIGNAL INTERFACE DEFINITION CONTACTS jad nasa ad X005 4 X842 24 The magazine zero return Set by meee erosion parame X005 5 XS42 The detection switch of the Set by CE caro pm xose xs 25 Undefined X006 0 X922 The external MPG X axis om o a X006 1 X922 The external MPG Y axis Normally EGRE P EP X006 2 X922 The external MPG Z axis Normally BEEN P X006 3 X922 24 The external MPG A axis Normally Bid RN encinas X006 4 X922 25 The external MPG step Normally EUN NENNEN A X006 5 X922 The external MPG step Normally EQUES A The external MPG step Normally width O 1 open contact X006 7 X922 ESP 9 22 The external emergency NC contact A EA e X007 0 XS23 44 Completing to switch Set by between the parameters speed position mode X007 1 XS23 21 Completing the spindle Set by per mm ee ee X007 2 XS23 5 The spindle speed reach Set by AAA ed R X007 3 XS23 20 The spindle zero speed NC contact ue om m eem INS 3 3 The Output Interface 3 3 1 The Circuit Principle of the Output Interface S j D 2 O 5 D H a The specification of the transistor for output Q When the output is ON the maximum load current includes the instant current below 200mA 2 When the output is ON the maximum satuation voltage is 1 6V during 200mA and its typical value is 1V 154 Chapter Three The Machine Control I O Interface 3 When the output is
205. lative parameters about the screw pitch error the parameters become valid after returning to the mechanical zero point and power on again eo Setting the compensation parameters in one direction taking X axis as an example The zero return screw pitch compensation is set in positive direction and the mechanical zero point is taken as the reference point of the error compensation so the screw pitch error compensation can only be executed on the machine coordinate system List 4 7 1 P216 The compensation number of 255 eee PE P221 The compensation point 256 na ener P226 The compensation interval of 10 X axis screw pitch error P231 The compensation override of 0 001 X axis screw pitch error 0 124 125 126 127 S Setting 2 a al zi T point Machine E gg Pf coordinate Mechanical zero Setting 1270 000 30 000 20 000 10 000 0 value 1269 998 29 996 20 006 9 993 Mea8ured value Fig 4 7 1 The compensation value is setin screw pitch compensation X in offset List 4 7 2 e Do DRE DEDE BL EE 4 AMOUNT The zero return screw pitch compensation is set in negative direction and the mechanical zero point is taken as the reference point of the error compensation so the screw pitch error compensation can only be executed on the machine coordinate system List 4 7 3 PARAMETER SETTING VALUE P216 The compensation number of X reference point S 3 D 2 O 5 D H 5 P221 The comp
206. ly and the reference point return the rapid in JOG mode is valid 0 Before connecting the power supply and the reference point return the rapid in JOG mode is invalid LRP 1 Positioning GOO interpolation type is linear 0 Positioning GOO interpolation type is non linear RFO 1 Rapid feeding when the feed override is Fo the feeding stops 0 Rapid feeding when the feed override is Fo the feeding doesn t stop TDR 1 During tapping dry run is valid 0 During tapping dry run is invalid RDR 1 During cutting feed dry run is valid 0 During cutting feed dry run is invalid FDR 1 During rapid positioning dry run is valid 0 During rapid positioning dry run is invalid 0086 Dry run speed 5000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0087 The cutting feedrate at power on 300 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0088 GO rapid speed of X axis 5000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0089 GO rapid speed of Y axis 5000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0090 GO rapid speed of Z axis 5000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0091 GO rapid speed of the 4 axis 5000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min Chapter Four Machine Debugging 0093 Fo speed of rapid override of each axis common to 30 all axes Setting range 0 1000 mm min 0094 Maximum feedrate during rapid positioning common 8000 to all axes Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0095 The lowest feedrate during rapid positioning common to all axe
207. machine is with the external K005 1 NO YES cycle start K005 2 ied the system enters the debugging mode The switch selection of X axis limit 2 switches 1 switch K006 1 The switch selection of Y axis limit K006 2 The switch selection of Z axis limit K006 3 The switch selection of the 4 axis limit K006 4 THOSE select the normar open type for X NO YES axis zero return switch Wheth lect th t for Y K006 5 1 er selec Seine y open type for NO YES axis zero return switch Wheth lect th t for Z K006 6 lic er selec enolma y open type for NO VES axis zero return switch K006 7 Mid ee the normaly open type for NO YES the4 axis zero return switch K007 4 Whether cancel the 4 hardware limit Whether cancel the external emergency K007 5 YES stop Whether the spindle output analog voltage K007 6 ee dou YES 10V 10V K007 7 Whether use the spindle position mode NO Whether the spindle positioning detection is Normally K008 0 the normally open type NC type open type K008 1 The tool clamping releasing control External Panel selection button button Whether use the tool clamping releasing K008 2 l Y device or not NO NO NO ES O O NO Whether use the safety door detection K008 3 N YES device Whether the spindle is with the gear change K008 4 N YES device Check whether the reach detection is NC Normally K008 5 l l NC type type during the spindle speed speed open 189 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection M
208. magazine 1 The machine has the spindle tool automatically clamping releasing device which has the normally open in position check switch 2 The spindle has the positioning function and its positioning angle can be regulated 3 The tool magazine capacity must be less than 100 4 The tool magazine can execute CCW CW 5 The tool magazine has the count switch forward in position check switch and retraction in position check switch 6 The tool magazine has zero return switch optional B The connection of circuits relative with the magazine 1 Input Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System M CODE F SIGNAL FUNCTION REMARK Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram ADDRESS NOTE REMARK X002 2 The detection of the index worktable Normally open releasing contact The detection of the index worktable Normal open X002 3 clamping contact The external clamping releasing tool control Normally open X002 5 The tool releasing detection contact l l Normally open X002 6 The tool clamping detection contact l l B Normally open or X005 1 The magazine advance in position NC WP af Normally open or X005 2 The magazine retraction in position NC Normally open or X005 3 The magazine counting switch NC X005 4 The magazine zero return in position Optional X005 5 The current toolpot tool check switch Optional X007 1 The spindle orientation in position NC contact Output 2 NOTE REMARK 001
209. motor enable is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Without Alarm information 1225 The spindle orientation in position is detected abnormal Reason When the spindle executes the movement of in position Y2 1 1 in the time set by T013 the spindle position detection switch X7 1 is ON Trouble shooting 1 The spindle drive unit or the spindle encoder is abnormal 2 Detect whether Y6 3 is output 3 Adjust the time of T013 again Alarm information 1226 The spindle gear is abnormal Reason Detect the spindle gear abnormal Trouble shooting When the spindle is in gear I Y3 4 1 in the time set by T0021 if the gear in position detection switch X4 1 is OFF adjust the time of T0021 or check whether X4 1 is 198 Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram ON or not When the spindle is in gear I Y3 5 1 in the time set by T0022 if the gear II in position detection switch X4 2 is OFF adjust the time of T0022 or check whether X4 2 is ON or not When the spindle is in gear III Y3 671 in the time set by T0023 if the gear III in position detection switch X4 3 is OFF adjust the time of T0023 or check whether X4 3 is ON or not Alarm information 1227 The magazine can t revolve because it isn t in the origin Reason The magazine isn t in the tool retraction position and Z axis isn t in the origin magazine CW or magazine CCW in the JOG mode is pressed the alarm occurs Trouble shooting
210. mping is executed and the worktable is rotated or the index worktable is adjusted into the debugging mode k12 6 is set as 1 finally the rotation of the index table is executed Alarm information 1292 The index worktable can t move because it doesn t clamp Reason When the index worktable is released the feeding axis is executed the movement 206 Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram Trouble shooting Firstly the index worktable clamping is executed and the feeding axis is executed movement or the index worktable is adjusted into the debugging mode K12 6 is set as 1 finally the feeding axis is executed the movement Alarm information 1293 The cycle start can t be operated because the safety door is open Reason When the safety door detection device is started K8 3 1 the cycle start button is pressed when the safety door is not closed X4 5 0 Trouble shooting The cycle start is executed after the safety door is closed Alarm information 1294 The index worktable can t start because it doesn t clamp Reason When the index worktable is released the cycle start button is pressed Trouble shooting Firstly the index worktable is clamped and then the cycle start is executed Alarm information 1360 The lubrication pressure is low or the oil level is low Reason Trouble shooting Detect the state of X001 7 Points for attention About the alarms of user defined as the reasons there isn t any alarms i
211. mulation along the 3 axis of MO F303 the high speed card Pulse accumulation along the 4 axis of F304 the high speed card Pulse accumulation along the 5 axis of F305 the high speed card Pulse accumulation spindle of high speed EN F306 card Emoalam F307 Emoalam F308 Buffer area dimension of interpolation i F309 point Numbersoffitingpoint F310 Numbersofcontrolable pont J F311 Timesofthecompletionofthetask 1 F312 Buffer area dimension ofthe ARM control F313 O Symbol of task completion 1 F314 Signalcatth 24 F315 oignal catch F316 DSP alarm information F317 S D uonounJ 90 Appendix APPENDIX TWO The ADDRESS of PLC CNC GO00 G064 Appendix list 2 po Signal Symbol Miscellaneous function end signal G00080 End signal of M code miscellaneous function MFIN G000 1 Gear selection signal input GR1 GR2 GR3 G002 0 2 ree in position signal of spindle analog value GEAR GO0234 Rigid tapping signal RGTAP G003 1 Interruption signal of user macro program UINT GO009 1 Encode signal of rapid override RVO RV1 G01120 1 FV1 FV2 FV4 Rapid override encode signal 1 2 4 8 and 16 FV8 FV16 G011 3 7 Overtravel signal L1 eL5 G012 0 4 L1 L5 G013 0 4 Editing lock signal LEDT G016H6 Operation panel lock si
212. n 1360 The lubrication pressure low or the oil level low Reason Trouble shooting Detect the state of X001 7 Points for attention About user defined reason this kind of alarms aren t designed in the ladder diagram in which the user should rewrite the ladder diagram to add List V The definitions of TMR parameters NOTE USER INITIAL ADDRESS SETTING VALUE ms The time delay unit of the T0001 e spindle CW rotation finish The time delay unit of the T0002 spindle CCW rotation finish The time delay unit of the T0003 spindle gear change finish The time delay unit of the T0004 Es spindle positioning finish The time delay unit of the T0007 spindle tool releasing finish The time delay unit of the T0005 miscellaneous function finish The time delay unit of the T0008 spindle tool clamping finish The time delay unit of T0006 the spindle gear change Setting the detection time T0009 of the spindle tool releasing Setting the detection time T0010 of the spindle tool clamping 248 Appendix Two The Usage Guide NOTE INITIAL USER ADDRESS SETTING VALUE ms VALUE function time delay finish Time delay of T code T0012 l 5 miscellaneous function finish 5 5 3 EE Setting the detection time T0013 m 8000 of the spindle positioning Setting the detection time T0014 00 of the spindle CW rotation Setting the detection time T0015 00 of the spindle CCW rotation Setting the time of T0016 de TP 0 lubr
213. n MO5 The spindle stops SON The spindle enable SAR PAR The spindle speed reach ZSP The spindle zero speed detection COIN The spindle orientation in position Parameter diagnosis output state on the system side STATE Y6 1 Y6 0 ADDRESS PIN NO X 23 25 XS23 09 Y6 0 the spindle CW signal output Y6 1 the spindle CCW signal output STATE ADDRESS PIN NO Y6 2 The spindle enable The parameter diagnosis the output state on the machine side STATE XT 3 X7 2 ADDRESS PIN NO X 23 20 XS23 05 X7 2 the spindle speed position reach signal input X7 3 the spindle zero speed detection signal input S D lt 2 O D O e O S c j D 2 O D o Cr PES E E Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System STATE X7 1 ADDRESS PIN NO X 23 21 X7 1 the spindle orientation finish signal Data parameters No 257 2 57 The spindle maximum speed during tapping cycle Data parameters No 258 215 8 The spindle maximum speed e Movement time sequence The spindle movement time sequence is shown as the following figure 4 9 1 UE The spindle stops The spindle CW CCW rotation Fig 4 9 1 The spindle CCW rotation time sequence e Control logic 1 When the system is ON the spindle stops MO5 signa
214. n The relay D is operated before relay A and then the relay E operates refer to the following figure Namely each relay is operated based upon the sequence of the ladder diagram compiling sequence y O Q Q 3 3 Q Fig 2 1 a Circuit illustration The differences between the relay circuit and PLC programming operation are shown below in the Fig 2 1 b and Fig 2 1 c Fig 2 1 b Fig 2 1 c 1 Relay circuit Both Fig 2 1 b and Fig 2 1 c are shared a same operation B and C are switched on after A is turned on B is cut off after C is ON euin oA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q 2 PLC program A same relay is shared a same circuit refer to the Fig 2 1 b B and C are switched on after A is turned on B is cut off after one cycle of the PLC program is performed In the Fig 2 1 c C is ON instead of B after C is turned on 2 2 The Performance of the Cycle PLC performs from the beginning to the end of the ladder diagram It performs again from the beginning of the ladder diagram after this diagram is performed which is called cycle performance The performance time from the beginning to the end of the ladder diagram is abbreviated as a period of a cycle treatment The shorter of the treatment period is the stronger of the response capacity of the signal is 2 3 The Priority Sequence of the Performance the 1st Level the 2nd level GSK218MC PLC program are
215. n JOG mode Function of USER3 button Start the switch of blowing the spindle List II The definitions of the output signal interface ADDRESS SIGNAL INTERFACE DEFINITION INTERFACE PIN NO voz xs 2 Teteireemg ompng The SD brake Los xs 5 no emitan Y 000 6 XS43 18 The red alarm lamp ON when the LAB RENE a Y 000 7 XS43 The yellow lamp ON when the system doesn t alarm and doesn t AA Bid 0 XS43 The green amp ox when the i ee IO ee voor X943 21 Chip removal control YOM42 X949 9 Lubricating conto Y002 4 XS44 The handhold unit lamp Y002 5 XS44 The manipulator running Y 002 6 XS44 18 The chip removal hydrovalve output Yo X94 6 The spindle poston speed mode veo X94 8 me magazine CWrotaion voa2 X94 9 The tool case vertical Y003 4 XS44 24 The spindle gear frequency A enema Y003 5 XS44 12 The spindle gear II frequency II 7g 225 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System ADDRESS SIGNAL INTERFACE DEFINITION BF A REN Y 003 6 XS44 25 The spindle gearl I frequency i conversion IO point control voos Xs 15 Without definition YO45 xs 5 Wimude n o YO4 X9 6 Wiud fwon voso Xe5 8 Wiudeion Yos2 Xs 9 Wiud fton vooo X953 9 Thespinde CWrotati n Y0o2 xss 24 Thespmdeenbie vows xem n Thespndeorenaton Switching between spee
216. n as the compensation origin and the compensation amount set by each axis is taken as the parameter value 4 The axes to be compensated X Y Z and 4 The point number to be compensated each 256 points in each axis 5 The range of compensation amount each compensation point 999 pulse equivalent 999 pulse equivalent x the compensation override 6 The setting method is same as the input method of the system parameters about it refer to Operation eo Points of attention for setting the compensation amount 1 Whether the screw pitch is compensated is set by bit parameter NO 37 0 2 Data parameters P216 P220 The screw pitch error compensation number of each axis reference point setting the compensation zero point 3 Data parameters P221 P225 Compensation point number of each axis screw pitch error S 3 D 2 O 5 D o o 4 Data parameters P226 P230 Compensation interval of each axis screw pitch error If the positive compensation interval is input compensation is executed based on the value If the negative interval is input and displayed by the absolute value compensation is executed based on the absolute value 5 The system parameters P231 P235 Each axis screw pitch error compensation override and the system defaults 0 001 165 Cr Wx Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 6 If the input compensation interval is O it doesn t require to compensate 7 After setting the re
217. n be performed by the pageup pagedown and other direction keys the components then can be viewed and modified S D O o D um o O 97 3 c D O Le D y O Gr ESE ES Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 1 2 3 PLCPAR Interface Enter PLCGRA interface pressing the HPLCGRA soft key it also can be set under the PLC interface defining the bit parameter NO 2642621 and press the programmable key to shift the screen entering the PLCGRA interface Refer to the Fig 1 2 3 1 98 ADDR Bit7 A BB BO Koao E 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DATA 11 41 06 PATH 1 cam Fig 1 2 3 1 The content and operation of the PLCPAR interface RUN Operation state of the ladder diagram ADDR Nonvolatile keep relay address Bit0 Bit7 Bit number state of the nonvolatile relay address 1 It means that this address remains the original state before the power off 0 It means that the address is rest to default state after the power is turned off Input Display the input data MDI Current working method Note The relative parameters of the PLCPAR can be modified as long as in the MID mode The searching and positioning can be performed by the pageup pagedown and other direction keys the corresponding address then can be viewed and modified Chapter One
218. n hitting tool may happen during the tool change in the next time 2 In MDI mode the tool change is commanded or it is operated in Auto mode When the magazine is in the advance limit position the spindle has already released the tool If the emergency stop power off alarm or resetting occurs Z axis is going to be lifted or the toolpot doesn t rotate after Z axis is lifted press tool release button on the spindle in JOG mode and then the tool is released Z axis is lifted to reach the safe position in JOG or MPG mode press tool retraction key on the system to exit the magazine the operation can be executed normally Remark The magazine chuck corresponding to the current spindle is loaded the tool if the spindle is without the tool the system should display T0000 3 In MDI mode the tool change is commanded or it is operated in Auto mode When the magazine is in the advance limit position Z axis is lifted to the 1 reference position When the tool is rotating the current tool number may not comply with the actual one if the emergency stop power off alarm or resetting occurs and the system alarms 1218 The magazine stops and confirm the tool number again due to the abnormal Or 1244 To guarantee the magazine safety the tool change stops due to the abnormal etc If the operation continues press tool retraction key on the system to exit the magazine in JOG mode after the magazine returns zero again and the
219. n not be performed and then alarms ACT Subprogram Hew Fig 5 3 1 Format Control condition ACT 0 next code after performing CALL ACT 1 call subprogram of the specified subprogram number Parameter Subprogram number specify the called subprogram number The subprogram number is indicated as 0 99 5 4 CALLU Call Subprogram Without Condition Function Call one specified subprogram without any condition 23 euin oA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q It owns the following characters and limitations Subprogram can be nested and called other subprograms up to 18 layers as for the endless repetition caused by the closure call the system may alarm The system allows that the maximum subprogram call number is 100 for controlling the performance data value The subprogram call can not be performed at the 1 level program The code or network wrote between END2 AND SP or after SPE or before SP the system can not be performed and then alarms Format Subprogram Fig 5 4 1 Parameter Subprogram serial number specify the called subprogram number its range is 0 99 5 5 SP Subprogram Function SP is used to generate a subprogram The subprogram number is regarded as its name The range of the subprogram is specified by the SP code and the aftermentioned SPE code together Notice 1 The subprogram should be compiled after END2 2 Another subprogram can not be set inside one subprogram Format
220. n order in D1 D24 8 tool case is rotated into the tool change position and then the tool is changed during executing T80M6 If D1 and D2 both are set as 8 the system alarms during executing T8M6 Appendix Two The Usage Guide F Setting the time parameter TMR relative with the magazine NOTE SETTING RANGE INITIAL ADDRESS VALUE ms T0004 The time delay unit of the Greater or equal to O BN NEM T0007 The time delay unit of the Greater or equal to O aerea tun T0008 The time delay unit of the Greater or equal to O mm T0009 Setting the detection time Greater than the 8000 P aame anaa ia racema imofeommeQ T0010 Setting the detection time of the Greater than the time 8000 Bill A T0013 Setting the detection time Greater than the 8000 HP enero Gems T0018 Setting detection delay time Relative with the 2000 P mesne postonng pestonngwan o T0036 The delay time of the index Greater or equal to O 500 Bl NEM T0037 The delay time of the index Greater or equal to O 500 Bill V EN T0038 The detection delay time for Greater or equal to O 5000 DA On T0039 The detection delay time for the Greater or equal to 0 5000 Bill MN T0040 The delay time of the index Greater or equal to O 4000 BN P ERN T0041 The delay time of the index Greater or equal to O 4000 BN V O T0100 The delay time 1 of the Greater than rotating 2000 aston tenn 00 mote owtaporime T0101 The delay time 2 of the Greater than ro
221. n signal of all axes MMLK F004 1 Type Output signal Function The machine lock signal state of all axes of the PLC Output condition When the signal is set to 1 the machine tool lock signal of all axes is set to 1 When the signal is set to O the machine tool lock signal of all axes is set to 0 Signal address 7 6 5 H4 3 2 Y 0 isa SS IARMAAAON 66 Chapter Five Automatical Operation 9 3 2 Dry Run Brief The dry run is only enabled to the automatic operation The machine operates with the constant feederate instead of performing the one defined in the program The feedrate is set by data parameter P86 This function is used for checking the move of the machine tool when the machine tool does not install the workpiece Signal Dry run signal DRN G021 2 Type Input signal Function Dry run enables Operation when this signal is set to 1 the machine tool moves based upon feedrate set by dry run The machine tool moves normally when the signal is set to 0 Note The dry run signal becomes 1 from O during the machine operation and the machine tool operation speed is the one of the dry run which is accelerated or decelerated by programming specified speed when the dry run signal becomes 0 from 1 the machine tool operation speed is accelerated or decelerated to the programming specified speed by the dry run speed S 3 D Signal address 7 6 5 4 3 2 H1 0 wp TO 1 dE LA y 5 3 3 Single Blo
222. n the ladder diagram so the ladder diagram should be rewritten by the user List V The definitions of TMR parameters USER INITIAL ADDRESS NOTE SETTING VALUE ms VALUE ms The time delay unit of the T0001 oe 500 spindle CW rotation finish T0002 The time delay unit of the 500 spindle CCW rotation finish The time delay unit of the T0003 500 spindle gear change finish The time delay unit of the T0004 we spindle orientation finish The time delay unit of the T0005 P miscellaneous function finish T0006 The spindle gear Enanos time 500 delay unit The time delay unit of the T0007 E spindle tool releasing finish The time delay unit of the T0008 peur spindle tool clamping finish T0009 Setting me detection ume 8000 of the spindle tool releasing Setting the detection ti etting e detection ine 8000 of the spindle tool clamping 207 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System USER INITIAL ADDRESS NOTE SETTING VALUE ms VALUE ms The time of the pulse T0011 50 signal 1 one second The time of the pulse T0012 50 signal 2 one second Setting the spindle T0013 CAT T 8000 positioning detection time Setting the spindle T0014 eee 500 CW detection time T0015 Setting the spindle 500 CCW detection time Setting the lubricating T0016 ee 30 OFF time unit min Setting the lubricating T0017 i 10 ON time unit sec Setting the spindle T0018 m MEN 2000 positioning delay detection time
223. n used Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1264 The abnormal occurs during switching the spindle position mode Reason When M29 code is executed the spindle position mode finish signal doesn t receive in the time set by T24 Trouble shooting Adjust the time set by T24 or check whether the spindle position mode finish signal is output or not Alarm information 1265 The abnormal occurs during switching spindle speed mode Reason When M28 code is executed the spindle speed mode finish signal doesn t receive in the time set by T28 Trouble shooting Adjust the time set by T28 or check whether the spindle speed mode finish signal is output or not Alarm information 1266 The gear change can t be operated during the spindle revolving Reason Trouble shooting Alarm information 1267 The magazine advance and retraction are detected abnormal Reason The system detects the signal of the magazine advance in position and the magazine 204 Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram retraction in position signal meanwhile Trouble shooting Detect whether the signals of X5 1 and X5 2 are normal or not and the switch type is correct or not Alarm information 1268 The spindle tool releasing and clamping are detected abnormal Reason The system detects the tool releasing and clamping signals at the same time Trouble shooting Detect whether the signals of X2 5 and X2 6 are normal or not and the switch
224. ncy stop or the resetting button is pressed the manipulator should return to zero position Firstly set K010 7 1 the magazine is entered the debugging state the manipulator is returned to zero position in JOG mode according to the above steps if the problem can t be resolved set KO12 7 1 and the manipulator is entered the debugging state and then all the limit conditions of running manipulator are released so be caution to operate it After the manipulator zero return set K010 7 0 and K012 7 0 the manipulator can run normally The introduction of setting KAPA parameters of PMC SETTING 1 Input the system debugging password Continuously press to enter the password screen INPUT in MDI mode input the system debugging password and then press key PASSWORD CORRECT is shown at the left bottom corner on the screen 2 Press PROGRAM CONTROL key on MDI keypad on EIPLCPAR interface press KPAR 261 Gr WIZ Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System softkey the system enters the check and setting interface of the relay in keep type press four direction keys on the keypad and the cursor can position whether K010 7 magazine is entered the SAVE debugging mode Press the numerical 1 and the enter key finally the data column reminds KPAR download is done which means saving is successful and the magazine debugging mode becomes valid Set K010 7 as 0 to exit the magazine debuggin
225. nd then press tool retraction key on the keypad and the magazine returns to the tool retraction position Please make sure the tool is clamped 3 In MDI mode set K010 7 to O as the above method 4 The previously recorded Z axis machine coordinate is set in the data parameter 0052 and the parameter should be set correctly otherwise the accident may happen to cause the mechanical damage Through the operation of the three steps the correct tool change can be executed the operation of T code and M code is operated as below TxxM6 and Txx M6 The executed effect is same TOMO The tool on the spindle is returned to the magazine WARNING When the spindle tool number is 0 the spindle can t be with any tools otherwise the accident may happen during tool change and causes the mechanical damage Appendix The setting method of DAPO03 positioning angle 1 Power on the control device default to display on LED EN 2 Press key to enter the monitoring mode the system displays 3 There are 25 display states in Monitor mode and select the state to look by pressing A v Find dp AP 9 The motor coded disc is the positioning disc and the spindle coded disc is taken as the positioning disc dp 5Po can be found press I1 the system displays E O or other numerical values 4 To realize the spindle positioning function the motor rotor should be rotated at least one circle to find the position When the motor is OFF
226. nd therefore the gn level program is performed the A 1 is latched to the 2 level program and then the first partition of the 2 level program is completed A turns into O to perform the 1 level program when the 2 8ms is performed then B 0 And therefore the 2 partition of the 2 level program is performed in this case the state of the A is still latched as the one last time So C 1 In this way the state both B and C are different 2 6 Interlocking In the sequence control the interlocking is very important from the safety issue It is necessary to use the interlocking in the sequence control programming Simultaneously the hard interlocking is used in the relay control circuit of the strong electric cabinet of the machine tool sides This is the reason that the interlocking is disabled when the hardware of the performance sequence programming malfunctions even if the interlocking is logically used in the sequence program software And therefore the interlocking can be ensured the safety for the user and prevent the machine tool from damaging in the strong electric cabinet of the machine sides Chapter Three PLC Address CHAPTER THREE PLC ADDRESS Address distinguishes signal Different address is separately corresponding to the I O signal at the side of the machine tool the I O signal at the side of the CNC the internal relay the counter the timer the keep relay and the data list Each address is composed of the ad
227. nder the screen is the interface corresponding with the current soft key BE means that it includes submenu all of the PLC operations are performed in the MDI mode other methods only can be viewed and searched 1 2 Programmable Interface Display 1 2 1 INFO Interface 1 Enter the programmable page by pressing the lt program controlled gt key enter the INFO interface pressing the INFO soft key refer to the fig 1 2 1 1 Also it can be set under the PLC interface defining the bit parameter No 2626 1 and then enter the INFO interface pressing the lt program controlled gt key again This interface offers some relative information of this system such as the version number modification data EXT FILE Ladder601 MT MODEL 850 VERSION MC8 00 CONTRIVER GSK FILE NAME SIZE Steps LEV1 LEVe MODIFY DATE ladder 155718 4414 117 4297 2011 06 10 15 11 DATA P J 5 1 5 5 JJ 1r4125 PATH 1 ETE EPLCGRA EPLCPAR PLCDGN EPLCTRA Fig 1 2 1 1 1 The ladder diagram name of current operation is supplied in the interface The ladder diagram divides into three types the only one ladder diagram in operating the rest of 15 ladder diagrams other than the operation of the ladder diagram 0 15 and the other ladder diagrams for compiling and reference any two numbers can be identified or named other than 0 15 2 The value of the system is set by bit parameter 53 0 3 when the power is turned
228. ndicated by the specified function code symbols The compiled ladder diagram should be stored and converted into the corresponding PLC codes before operating namely the so called instruction list 1 5 Sequence Programming Debugging Step 3 The sequence programming can be debugged using the following methods 1 Debugging with emulator The machine tool can be replaced by an emulator it composes of the lights and switches The input signal state of the machine tool can be expressed by the ON or OFF of the switches and the output signal state can be indicated by the ON or OFF of the light 2 Debugging with actual operation Debug on the actual machine tool It is better to prepare the precautions before debugging due to an unexpected behavior may occur Chapter Two Sequence Programming CHAPTER TWO SEQUENCE PROGRAMMING The operating principle is different with the common relay because the PLC sequence controlling is carried out by compiling the on line diagram And therefore it is better to thoroughly understand the sequence controlling principle when designing the PLC sequence programming euin oA 2 1 Performance Process of Sequence Programming In the general relay controlling circuits each of them can be simultaneously operated When the relay A is operated in the following figure the replay D and E can be operated when the contactor A and B are closed at the same Each replay in the PLC sequence control is operated in tur
229. ng printing preview and printing setup and the recently opened file list Note In the ladder diagram editing dialog box each volume of the ladder diagram version number suitable machine and ultimate modifier can be indicated by English instead of Chinese otherwise the error may occur after transferring O Edit menu The edit menu includes some functions such as the cutting copy pasting searching conversion and editing etc O View menu Control the display and concealing of the toolbar state bar output and command list windows O Window menu Control the selection and layout of each window Help menu Version information of this software 118 Chapter Four The User Explanation of the Ladder Diagram Software EDIT 4 3 Software Operation 4 3 1 Toolbar There are two toolbars of the main view frame which are related with the ladder diagram compilation 4 3 1 1 Main Toolbar Da amp BB oe 4 S 2 a New ladder diagram file gt _ Open the ladder diagram file m Save the ladder diagram file de Cut the selected content to the clipboard En Copy the selected content to the clipboard E Paste content from the clipboard UM Ladder diagram conversion S a Component search c 3 en Print the ladder E About the dialog box is D 9 4 3 1 2 Editing Toolbar 5 ARA 17 4 0 0 47 TF Insert the normally opened contact F Insert the
230. nsfer 8 RST Resetting NM MOVB Transfer of one byte L3 L JMPB Sign skip z pow MOVW Transfer of two bytes 10 Sign XMOV Binary indexed data transfer Timer 5 io DSCH Binary data search TMRB Regular timer E NE 1 Binary addition e Tl End of the concentric line m control 5 1 END1 End of the 1 Level Sequence Program euin oA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q Function This function can be specified once in sequence program at the end of the 1 level program or it can be performed at the beginning of the 2 4 level program when the 1 level program does not execute The first program can be compiled up to 500 steps 22 Chapter Five PLC Function Code END1 Fig 5 1 1 Format SWINJOA 5 2 END2 The End of the 2 Sequence Program Function It specifies at the end of the 2 level program END2 Fig 5 2 1 Format y A O Q Q 3 3 Q 5 3 CALL Call Subprogram Function Call one specified subprogram It owns the following characters and limitations Subprogram can be nested and called other subprograms up to 18 layers as for the endless repetition caused by the closure call the system may alarm The system allows that the maximum subprogram call number is 100 for controlling the performance data value The subprogram call can not be performed at the 1 level program The code or network wrote between END2 AND SP or after SPE or before SP the system ca
231. nsider the destination data may generate repeatedly it may stop the search outputting its address when detecting the destination data at the first time W 1 if the indexed data does not find REP 1 Perform DSCH code If the indexed data does not find or it has two or above data W 1 Reset RST RST 0 Release the reset RST 0 Reset W 0 Performance code ACT ACT 0 Do not perform DSCH code W keeps invariable ACT 1 Perform DSCH code Output its table number if the indexed data is found if it is not found or it has two more above data W 1 42 Chapter Five PLC Function Code Parameter Length Format specifies the length of the index data 1 1 byte length 2 2 bytes length S1 Data number storage address of the data table The byte length specified by this address is distributed the storage area for the requirement of the byte The data number of the data table is n 1 table head is O the end of the table is n S2 Set the data table head address S3 Set the input address of the index address S4 The address output of the index result Actual address head address table number table number is 0 S1 1 the actual address can not exceed the data table After indexing output its number from the list if the index data is found The table number is outputted to the index result output address of which the required storage byte number should be suitable for the specified format Output W 0 Find the indexed data W 1 Do no
232. nt name X2 1 affirm it by pressing INPUT the key and then the X002 1 appears at the current cursor position 3 The cursor is positioned at the next start position press the 4 H soft key a symbol of the normally opened contact occurs at the cursor positioning direct input the component name INPUT X2 4 affirm it by pressing the the component then appears at the current cursor position 4 Rightward one place of the cursor press the soft key draw a horizontal breakover line at the current cursor position 5 Upward one place of the cursor press the soft key draw a vertical breakover line at the lower right corner of the cursor ecoscoosocco 6 Press the soft key the output coil is automatically generated the required horizontal breakover line and then the output coil is produced at the right side of the ladder diagram INPUT Directly input the component name G1 0 affirm it by pressing thef the component G001 0 occurs at the current cursor position Chapter Two PLC Programming Operation The compiled ladder diagram is shown in the Fig 2 3 1 X001 4 X002 1 G001 0 X002 4 Fig 2 3 1 Ladder diagram illustration Explanation The green component indicates connection state in the ladder diagram regardless of the normally opened normally closed or output coil and the white one means disconnected state The dark color is disconnection state the light color is connected state based on the pu
233. nterface diagram of the external power supply of the system operation panel is shown as below ON COM1 COM2 OFF Fig 2 7 1 S j D Q O 5 D o o 149 Or Wis E Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System CHAPTER THREE THE MACHINE CONTROL I O INTERFACE 3 1 The Interface Signal List XS40 input 1 DB25 male plug XS41 input 2 DB25 male plug XS42 input 3 DB25 male plug IN32 LUE umm INS une o doe Gm 3 coy gt INO 3 com gt M9 3 COM 16 od 4 424v 19 COM EU Ee 4 1 24V IN36 5 IN05 INO 5 INZI 1f IN2O 9 IN37 18 IN38 15 N06 15 IN22 6 IN39 um suo s sm o A p 8 INO EAM 8 n AE 8 IN40 r9 TET 9 TINIO 21 IN09 NIETO 2l IN25 9 IN42 22 1N43 fo com mii 10 COM 24 IN27 10 COM 23 COM gay 23 COM laa 125 COM 11 24V zz TN44 rms 24 INI2 12 i9 24 IN28 12 IM 95 25 INI4 25 IN30
234. o setting tool case number D245 The spindle tool number Points for attention 1 The setting value of D100 is less than 100 and the setting value is same as that of CTR100 otherwise the abnormal occurs For example When D100 16 the data list D001 D016 are valid When D100 24 the data list D001 D024 are valid 2 DOOO only displays the spindle tool number and the spindle tool number can t be rewritten in DOOO and the spindle tool number should be rewritten in D245 3 The value of D241 should be rewritten 4 D240 D247 is only used by the system so the customers can t use the parameters as the user defined 5 About the details please refer to chapter III List VII Definitions of CTR parameters 210 Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram ADDRESS NOTE INITIAL VALUE USER SETTING VALUE Setting the magazine 16 capacity Points for attention 1 The setting value of CT R100 should be less than 100 and same as that of D100 otherwise the abnormal occurs For example When CTR100 16 the toolcase number of the magazine is 16 When CTR100 24 the toolcase number of the magazine is 24 List VII Definition of M codes L Nos roa sondes M06 F0303 Automatic toolchangs M0 Fosto ColnpfdON M0 F0 Celngf dOFF mo F02 Amidamig MM F3 Aes releasing Mi F0260 Spindle tool releasing code Mir F0261 Spindle tool clam
235. ol number isn t specified by T code in the tool list DOOO DO99 or the tool code specified by T code is repeated in the tool list Trouble shooting The tool number value is rewritten in the tool list Alarm information 1246 The spindle tool releasing or clamping is detected abnormal Reason The spindle tool is neither in the releasing position nor the clamping position Trouble shooting Detect whether X2 5 and X2 6 is normal or not Alarm information 1247 The spindle orientation time sequence is detected abnormal Reason Before the spindle orientation the finish signal is done Trouble shooting Check whether the signal of X5 0 is normal or not Alarm information 1248 Executing T code tool number condition is not satisfied Reason Before the 1 T code tool number isn t completed the 2 T code is executed Trouble shooting After completing to execute the 1 T code tool number the 2 T code is executed Alarm information 1249 The tool advance can t be operated because the spindle is with a tool Reason When Z axis is in the origin and the spindle is with a tool D245 is not 0 the tool advance in the magazine is executed Trouble shooting Unload the spindle tool and set D245 as 0 Alarm information 1250 The tool advance can t be operated because the tool number of the spindle is different with the current one of the magazine Reason The tool advance in the magazine is executed when Z axis is in the tool change pos
236. once each 8 n ms If its steps of the 1 level program is increased and therefore the steps of the 2 level program within 8ms should be reduced correspondingly the partition value may be increased and the treatment time of the overall program will be longer So the compiling of the 1 level program should be shorter 2 4 Sequence Programming Structure The ladder diagram is compiled with sequence in the traditional PLC It owns the following advantages in the ladder diagram language allowing the structured programming 1 The program is easy to comprehend and compile 2 Itis more convenient to find the faults during the programming 3 It is easy to find some reasons when the operation malfunction occurs The methods of the main structure programming are shown below 1 Sub program The subprogram is regarded as a treatment unit based on the ladder diagram Fig 2 4 1 2 Nesting One subprogram can be performed the task by calling another one Main program Subprogram 1 Subprogram 2 Task A1 Task A11 Task A12 Fig 2 4 2 euin oA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q 3 Conditional branch The main program is performed circularly and checks whether its conditions are suitable The corresponding subprograms are performed under these conditions vice versa Main program Subprogram 1 Treatment 1 Treatment 2 Fig 2 4 3 Treatment 11 Treatment A12 Treatment A12 2 5 The Treatment of the
237. oolpot isn t in position Reason Trouble shooting Alarm information 1288 The index worktable is released and detected abnormal Reason When the worktable is executed the releasing movement Y 1 671 the worktable is released in position in the time set by T38 while the detection switch X2 2 doesn t operate Trouble shooting 1 Check whether the switch is normal when the table is released in position 2 Check whether Y 1 6 is output or not 3 Adjust the time set by T38 Alarm information 1289 The index worktable clamping is detected abnormal Reason When the worktable is executed the clamping movement Y 1 721 in the time set by T39 the worktable is clamped in position while the detection switch X2 3 doesn t operate Trouble shooting 1 Check whether the switch is normal when the worktable is clamped in position 2 Check whether Y 1 7 is output or not 3 Adjust the time set by T39 Alarm information 1290 The index worktable doesn t start the clamping device Reason When the index worktable clamping device doesn t start K12 4 0 the index worktable releasing or clamping command is executed Trouble shooting After setting K12 4 as 1 the index worktable releasing or clamping command is executed Alarm information 1291 The index worktable can t be rotated because it doesn t release Reason When the index worktable is released the index worktable rotation is executed Trouble shooting Firstly the index worktable cla
238. or check whether X004 1 is ON or not When the spindle is in gear II Y3 5 1 the gear ILin position detection switch X004 2 is OFF in the time set by T0022 adjust the time of T0022 or check whether X004 2 is ON or not When the spindle is in gear III Y3 6 1 the gear III in position detection switch X004 3 is OFF in the time set by T0023 adjust the time of T0023 or check whether X004 3 is ON or not 236 Appendix Two The Usage Guide Alarm information 1215 M06 code should be executed after T code Reason After executing M06 code the valid T code isn t executed Trouble shooting After executing the valid T codes M06 code is executed Alarm information 1216 The spindle can t be rotated in the tool releasing state Reason The spindle rotation codes are executed when the tool is released For example spindle CW CCW rotation inch or positioning is executed in JOG mode or M03 M04 or M19 is executed in AUTO mode which causes the spindle rotation Trouble shooting In JOG mode press clamp release button to make the tool clamped Y0 2 10 and detect whether the tool clamping detection switch X2 6 is 1 or not when the state is 1 the system doesn t alarm during the spindle rotating Alarm information 1217 The tool can t be released during the spindle rotating Reason When the spindle is rotating the code of tool releasing is executed Trouble shooting The alarm can be avoided when the tool releasing code is executed
239. ormally such as M3 and M4 218MC is with the external emergency stop button while 218MC H V is with the internal emergency stop button 158 Chapter Four Machine Debugging and the allocation is on the system operation panel Its required to correctly display the alarm some axis X Y or Z in some direction positive or negative when the servo axis overruns And it guarantees that after the overrun is released the axis can t move in the overtravel direction when some axis overruns and the alarm occurs Therefore GSK218MC system provides two connection methods of overrun limit switches to satisfy the customers requirements A The situations of two limit switches One limit switch of some axis in the positive direction the other is in the negative 1 Please strictly connect as the following list List 4 3 1 ADDRESS SIGNAL INTERFACE DEFINITION CONTACT BMC NENNEN X000 0 XS40 Limit signal of X axis in positive NC contact direction X000 1 XS40 14 Limit signal of X axis in NC contact meme Uo memedecen X000 2 XS40 2 Limit signal of Y axis in positive NC contact met m o X000 3 XS40 15 Limit signal of Y axis in NC contact AAA o memedecen o X000 4 XS40 17 Limit signal of Z axis in positive NC contact eme oT emo o X000 5 XS40 5 Limit signal of Z axis in NC contact em omm O Pr oo X000 6 XS40 18 Limit signal of the 4 axis in NC contact X000 7 XS40 Limit signal of the 4 axis in NC contact mere qs negative direction
240. ould be converted when it is edited and saved which can be generated the performable file after converting and then transfer to the CNC using the serial port communication software or U disk that it is performed by the PLC from the CNC system Refer to the Chapter Eleven System Communication in the Volume Three of the 278MC Programming and Operation Manual The ladder diagram file is then produced Select the file Alt F Ladder diagram file producing L of the main menu save it after inputting the name and path the ladder diagram file with the extension name grp is produced which can be used in Milling machine and machining center of the GSK218MC series S c 3 D O Lo D Q O The configuration format of the ladder diagram is shown in the Appendix Two 125 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 3 c D O Le D y O 126 Chapter One The System Configuration and Installation VOLUME IV INSTALLATION AND CONNCETION S D lt 2 O D O e O 127 Cr PES E E Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System S D lt 2 le D O r O 128 Chapter One The System Configuration and Installation CHAPTER ONE THE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION 1 1 Composition of the System GSK218MC CNC system is composed of the following units and the composition of the system i
241. pindle speed into position mode A ee 1265 A008 1 Switching spindle position into speed mode IN O ee 1266 A008 2 The gear change can t be operated during A e 1267 A008 3 The manipulator cant be operated because the toolcase isn t vertical 233 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System PMC A ADDRESS ALARM CONTENT ALARM NUMBER 1268 A008 4 The manipulator cant be operated B dil i because it isn t in the origin 1269 A008 5 The manipulator stops due to the operation II n 1270 A008 6 The manipulator tool holding detected 1271 A008 7 The manipulator cant be operated mower because the spindle doesn t orientate 1272 A009 0 The manipulator cant be operated because the spindle tool doesn t release 1273 A009 1 The manipulator cant be operated A because the spindle tool doesn t clamp 1274 A009 2 Tool advance can t be operated because NENNT 1275 A009 3 The tool retraction cant be operated mw because the manipulator isn t in the origin 1276 A009 4 he toolpot cant rotate because the di manipulator isn t in the origin 1277 A009 5 The toolpot cant rotate because the dl Real toolcase isn t in the level position 1278 A009 6 The manipulator cant be operated because Z axis doesn t return to the 2 reference position 1279 A009 7 The manipulator origin position detected dl Basi rd 1280 A010 0 Compel to stop magazine rotating due to o ee ee 1288 A011 0 he index worktable releasing detec
242. ping code Lm Res e pe F032 5 spindle X neutral LB F026 3 The tool searching code in the A ds M22 F026 4 The tool searching code in pow holding a new tool M23 FO26 5 The spindle bit code in the AE magazine swaying direction M24 FO26 6 The code of the magazine A otto tn O FO27 5 Starting chip removal FO27 6 Turning off the chip removal ee ELLEN F032 3 Canceling the rigid tapping code Co 211 Or WW BxI F028 0 Program end M32 F031 4 Lubricating ON Reserved M35 FO28 1 Starting the spiral chip removal IN IN o M36 F028 2 Turning off the spiral chip M4 F026 7 Starting to blow the spindle MB F027 0 Stopping blowing the spindle F027 1 Starting automatical tool change MEER F027 2 Automatical tool change end a M53 F027 3 Detect whether the tool is Reserved correct after the tool change omm M55 F027 4 Detect whether the spindle is Reserved BINNEN Points for attention 1 F and M codes with Reserved in F signal table cannot be used 2 M16 M17 M21 M22 M23 and M24 are valid when the tool change is being executed and they cannot run separately 3 Usage and Maintenance of GSK218MC CNC System with the Turret Magazine 1 The tool magazine installation and setting related PLC parameters Operation aim Ensure the ladder diagram fit to the allocation of the magazine 212 A Requirements of the machine when the ladder diagram is matched with the turret
243. ponding conversion data of the table number is taken out from conversion table to output the output address to the conversion data S2 Conversion table Conversion number data E input data EN EX onversion address HE aes data output S1 address S2 Parameter Length 1 Specify the byte number of the binary system data of the conversion data in the conversion table 1 Binary system of 1 byte 2 Binary system of 2 bytes Length2 The capacity of the conversion table data Each conversion table capacity can not more than 100 it is 100 bytes when 1 type format is specified it is 100 bits when 2 bytes format are specified The total capacity of the entire COD codes conversion table should be less than 512 bytes S1 The data in the conversion table can be taken out by the specifying table number and the address of the specifying table number is regarded as the input address of the conversion data This address should be supplied a register with one byte S2 The output address of the conversion data Specify the byte numbers of the register in the form specification beginning with the address Output If the abnormal occurs during the COD code performs W 1 it indicates that the error issues Note The capacity of the conversion data table is up to 100 bytes bits this table is compiled between the parameter conversion data output address and error output W 32 Chapter Five PLC Function Code 5 17 COM Concentr
244. position is valid Trouble shooting Set K010 6 as O C About the details refer to chapter II The usage method and maintenance of GSK218MC CNC system with the disc magazine Alarm information 1244 To guarantee the magazine safety the tool change stops due to the abnormal Reason When the tool change is executed automatically in the magazine the tool change stops due to the abnormal or the manipulator isn t in the origin during starting the system which causes the alarm The alarm only reminds the operator that the tool number of the magazine and that of the 24 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System spindle may be in disorder even clearing the alarm doesn t mean the magazine is normal so the tool numbers of the magazine and the spindle should be reset C About the details refer to chapter II The usage method and maintenance of GSK218MC CNC system with the disc magazine Trouble shooting Readjust the magazine and confirm whether the tool number of the magazine is complied with that of the spindle including whether the manipulator is in the origin the toolcase returns to the level position the spindle is clamped or not whether the current toolcase number complies with the current value of CTR100 whether the tool number of the spindle complies with the value of D245 Alarm information 1245 There isn t the tool number code in the tool list or the tool number code is repeated Reason The to
245. quantity and its range is displayed at the right side 5 Stop condition Without Do not stop tracing Buffer area full It stops tracing when the buffer area is full Signal trigger It stops tracing by the signal trigger Trigger setting This parameter is enabled when the stop condition is selected to the signal trigger 1 Address The input signal address is regarded as trigger stopping R address can not be used for trigger stopping 100 Chapter One PLC Interface Display 2 Mode It determines that what kind trigger mode is used to stop tracing Rising edge The tracing is automatically stopped by the rising edge of the trigger signal Falling edge The tracing is automatically stopped by the falling edge of the trigger signal Any change The tracing is automatically stopped by the rising or falling edge of the trigger signal 6 Sampling condition This parameter is enabled when the sampling mode is set to signal change which is determined the sampling condition Signal trigger The specified mode changes when the signal specified by the trigger address which is set by the sampling condition collect the signal Any change Any change occurs when the signal specified by the trigger address which is set by the sampling condition Trigger setting When the sampling mode is set to signal change and then the sampling condition is set to signal trigger this parameter is enabled 1 Address T
246. r not Alarm informationin 1215 Execute MO6 code after executing T codes Reason When MO6 code is executed the valid T codes are not executed Trouble shooting After executing the valid T codes MO6 code is executed Alarm information 1216 When the tool is released the spindle can t revolve Reason When the tool is released the code of the spindle revolution is executed For example In the JOG mode press the spindle CW CCW rotation inch or positioning or in the auto mode press M03 M04 or M19 the spindle gets revolved Trouble shooting In JOG mode press clamp release button the tool is clamped Y0 220 Check whether the tool clamp detection switch X2 6 is 1 when the state is 1 the alarm doesn t occur during the spindle revolution Alarm information 1217 The tool can t be released during the spindle revolving Reason When the spindle is revolving the code of the tool release is executed Trouble shooting When the spindle stops the tool release code can be executed to avoid the alarm Alarm information 1218 When the magazine is abnormal and stops the tool number should be confirmed again Reason When M6 code is being executed and the magazine is revolving the alarm occurs or press reset key the alarm occurs Trouble shooting 1 The magazine zero return is operated again 2 Reset the spindle tool number and the magazine tool number C About the detailed operation please refer to Chapter II The usage method
247. r not to rewrite the other addresses if the operator can t guarantee the safety 221 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 2 The Allocation and Definition of PMC I O Address and the Internal software Components in GSK218MC CNC System List I The definitions of the input signal interfaces ADDRESS SIGNAL INTERFACE DEFINITION CONTACT INTERFACE PIN NO X000 0 XS40 X axis positive limit signal NC contact X000 1 XS40 14 X axis negative limit NC contact signal X000 2 XS40 O E Y axis positive limit signal NC contact X000 3 XS40 Y axis negative limit NC contact signal X000 4 XS40 17 Z axis positive limit signal NC contact X000 5 XS40 5 Z axis negative limit NC contact WE Ses lhc ail X000 6 X840 18 The 4 axis positive limit NC contact X000 7 XS40 The 4 axis negative limit NC contact X001 0 XS40 axis zero return NC contact X001 1 XS40 axis zero return NC contact RR X001 2 XS40 Z axis zero return NC contact per 5o o femme IS X001 3 XS40 22 The 4 axis zero return NC contact X001 4 XS40 24 Emergency stop 218MC NC contact EUER RN X001 5 XS40 12 External cycle start Normally BEEN REN X001 6 XS40 25 External feed hold Normally Bl EN EN EN Pe X001 7 XS40 13 Detecting the lubrication Normally eU ee encor X002 0 XS41 1 Detecting the air Normally eb Un t ecos X002 1 XS41 14 Jumping signal Normally eq mm o uem Po X002 2 XS41 2 Detecting the index Normally i
248. ram and it is used for the interface signal between macro program and PLC The corresponding system variables of these signals are shown below Table 9 1 2 UO008 F55 0 1108 UO009 F55 1 1109 UOO10 F55 2 1110 UO011 F55 3 1111 Note 1132 is the variable of the 16 bit which is composed as follows H7 6 5 4 3 H2 1 0 4 1132 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000 1132 UO015 UO014 UO013 UO012 UO011 UO010 UO009 UO008 S D uonounJ 82 Chapter Nine Programming Code 9 2 Canned Cycle Brief Canned cycles can be simplified the program With a canned cycle a frequently used machining operation can be specified in a single block with a G function without canned cycles normally more than one block is required In addition the use of canned cycles can shorten the program to save memory Explanations A canned cycle consists of a sequence of 6 operations Operation 1 Positioning a hole position Operation 2 Rapid traverse up to Point R level Operation 3 Hole machining Operation 4 Operation at the bottom of a hole Operation 5 Retraction to point R level Operation 6 Rapid traverse up to the initial point Operation 1 u l on Initial point Operation 2 gt Operation 6 S D R Operation 3 Operation 5 uonounJ Operation 7 Rapid traverse Cutting feed Fig 9 2 1 Canned cycle operation sequence Spindle control O
249. ramming X002 1 Y003 7 RD X002 1 OR NOT F100 3 F100 3 WRT Y003 7 Fig 4 3 1 4 4 OR STK Code Mnemonic symbol and function Mnemonic symbol Function Right shift one bit of the stacked register after ohne STO and ST1 logic OR Code explanation e OR STK code is the separate code without any address Refer to the following programming Table 4 4 1 YO03 7 RD X002 1 AND NOT X002 2 ooe RD NOT F100 3 AND F100 6 OR STK X002 1 X002 2 HH F100 3 F100 6 OR RO22 1 WRT Y003 7 Fig 4 4 1 There are three branches D and from the left bus to the node N1 The branches and are series connection circuit block When the series connection circuit block is performed between bus to node or among the nodes other than the first branch use the RD code when the following branch is ended The branch 3 is not a series connection circuit block which can be used by the OR code OR STK and AND STK are the code without operation component which indicates the OR AND relationships between circuit blocks 4 5 AND STK Code Mnemonic symbol and function Table 4 5 1 Mnemonic symbol Right shift one bit of the stacked memory after STO and ANO SIR ST1 logic AND Code explanation 20 Chapter Four PLC Basis Code Use the AND STK coded when the branch circuit parallel circuit block is connected with series connection with the front of the circuit The start of the branch is used RD
250. rollable unit are shown below All of the axes are decelerated in the automatical operation even if only the overtravel signal of one axis turns into 1 the alarm occurs and stops The axis with movement signal 1 is decelerated and stopped in the manual operation the axis after stopping can be moved along with the negative direction The movement direction of the axis is memorized once its overtravel signal turns into 1 Before eliminating the alarm this signal axis can not moved along with this direction even if the signal becomes O Signal address G012 I CPAU pM Iw 2 3 Alarm Signal Brief When the alarm occurs in the CNC which displays on the screen and its alarm signal is set to 1 Signal Alarm signal AL F001 0 Type Output signal Function The alarm signal indicates that the following alarms are displayed when the CNC is in the alarm state a P S alarm b Overtravel alarm C Servo alarm Output condition The alarm signal is 1 in the following conditions CNC is in the alarm state The alarm signal is O in the following situation Clear the alarm by the CNC resetting Signal address 7 6 5 4 3 2 H1 0 Forf pop S T J 2 4 Selection of the Operation Method Signal Detection signal in the operation method F003 0 F003 7 Type Output signal Function It indicates the selected operation method Signal address 7 6 5 H4 3 2 Hi 0 F003 56 Chapter Two Ready
251. rtical In JOG mode press tool advance button the tool case is vertical in position The manipulator is hold the tool in JOG mode In JOG mode press tool change manipulator button the manipulator operation 1 completes The tool releasing In JOG mode press clamp release the tool is released in position The manipulator tool change in JOG mode Press tool change manipulator button again and the manipulator operation 2 completes The tool clamping Press tool clamping releasing again the tool is clamped in position The manipulator is returned to the manipulator origin in JOG mode Press tool change manipulator button at the 3 time the manipulator operation 3 completes The manipulator operation in JOG mode completes In the normal situation the conditions of running the manipulator in JOG mode The spindle orientation complete the tool case vertical in position Z axis is returned to the tool change point C Confirming the magazine rotation direction In JOG mode press MAG CW and the magazine is rotated according to the prescribed negative direction of the machine press MAG CCW and the magazine is rotated according to the prescribed positive direction of the machine otherwise the magazine counting will be disorder to cause that the tool change is executed wrongly which can be resolved by regulating the phase sequence of the motor 259 Gr WIZ Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC Sy
252. rwise the accident may happen 2 After rewriting K001 0 parameter it becomes valid after restarting the system When K001 0 0 i e the magazine is not used setting K010 0 K010 1 K010 2 K010 3 K010 4 K010 5 K010 6 K010 7 K011 0 K011 1 K011 2 and K011 3 are invalid 3 When K001 0 1 i e The magazine usage is valid setting K008 2 is invalid 4 When K008 2 0 1 e The tool clamping releasing device is not used setting K008 1 is invalid 5 Points for attention of setting K006 0 When X axis is installed two limit switches the positive is connected with X0 0 the negative is connected with X0 1 setting K006 0 as O is valid When X axis is installed one limit switch connected with X0 0 setting K006 0 as 1 is valid Setting K006 1 of Y axis K006 2 of Z axis and K006 3 of the 4 axis is same as that of X axis 6 When K005 2 1 all the alarm interlock is released the system enters the debugging mode which is only used for system testing The parameter should be set as 0 during the normally usage otherwise the accident may happen 7 About the parameters of K010 1 K010 2 K010 3 K010 4 K010 6 K010 7 K011 0 K011 1 and K012 7 which are relative to the magazine please refer to Chapter II the usage and maintenance of the magazine 8 When K004 0 1 Whether the spindle uses I O point control K008 4 the spindle is with the gear change device or not setting is invalid that is to say the spindle is without the gear
253. s Setting range 0 500 mm min 0096 The maximum control speed during cutting feed 6000 common to all axes Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0097 The lowest control speed during cutting feed common to all axes Setting range 0 500 mm min 0098 Feedrate during continuous feeding of each axis is 2000 JOG mode Setting range 0 5000 mm min 0099 Reference point return speed FL common to all 40 axes Setting range 0 500 mm min 0100 Reference point return speed of X axis 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0101 Reference point return speed of Y axis 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0102 Reference point return speed of Z axis 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min S D lt 2 O D O e O 0103 Reference point return speed of the 4 axis 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0170 opeed of rapid positioning of X axis in JOG mode 5000 Setting range 0 30000 mm min 177 S 3 D 2 O D o 5 Cr PES EE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 0171 Speed of rapid positioning of Y axis in JOG mode 5000 Setting range 0 30000 mm min 0172 opeed of rapid positioning of Z axis in JOG mode 5000 Setting range 0 30000 mm min 0173 Speed of rapid positioning of the 4 axis in JOG 5000 mode Setting range 0 30000 mm min 4 15 Setting the Relative Tapping Parameters Positioning parameter number 0
254. s K cccccnnnooconocccocononananannnonoconanananonocccnonnnnnnnonnncconnnnnnnnnnnncnnos 16 3 7 Information Display Request Address A cccconcnoccnnnnccccononanananonoconananananonococonananananononons 16 9 9 COUMTE O laa nata 17 3 9 Counter Preset Value Address DC ccoononococcccnccononononananononononnnanononocononannnnonnnrocononnnannnnncnnns 17 gt 10 Timer Address Tirana aaa taa 17 3 11 Presetting Value Address of the Timer DT 17 3 12 Data Table Address iD nara ica 17 o T5 olgmAddress teo ios ajo 17 9 14 SubDprogram NUITDer Planta i 17 CHAPTER FOUR PLC BASIS CODE cnn di 18 4 1 RD RD NOT WRT and WRT NOT Codes 5 er ini 18 42 AND ANDINO TCOdeS sar 19 AS ORR OR NOT COGE S sra daa 19 AA OR STK COJE Sang TSP Pa tnt tette 20 AAN DS SCOOTER 20 CHAPTER FIVE PEC FUNCTION COD Essen na aan 22 5 1 END1 End of the 1 Level Sequence Program 22 5 2 END2 The End of the 2 Sequence Program 23 So CALLE Call SUBDI Og alti sed tesistut du adim A ID ME ED I DLE 23 5 4 CALLU Call Subprogram Without ConditiON ccccccoononononcnoconononanananonoconanananananonons 23 So P TSBHDDEIOGEI SII aea A 24 06 SPE ENd O SUD Mid aaa rete as din 24 o FL SET Replacement Sid uso icu EIE DE UEM MM M es 25 FIRS sicci iR papis TTE 25 9 9 JMPB Makk NUMDE SKID ets Gat toe dac so een dv llas 26 5 10 LCBE MarKkNUMDET ti UU lta aca itetdt Leen tats kanasshiuet tates 26 Coe Wt TIME CME SIS
255. s X006 2 X922 The external MPG Z axis Normally EN NEN IA X006 3 X922 24 The external MPG A axis Normally per mE qe encina X006 4 X922 25 The external MPG width Normally BEEN ca X006 5 X922 The external MPG width Normally EUREN E X006 6 X922 The external MPG width Normally 0 1 open contact X006 7 XS22 ESP 9 22 The external emergency NC contact 185 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System ADDRESS SIGNAL INTERFACE DEFINITION CONTACT TUM menace E PS stop X007 0 XS23 Completing to switch Set by between speed position parameters mode X007 1 XS23 21 The spindle orientation Set by p omm m met X007 2 XS23 5 The spindle speed reach Set by A ete X007 3 XS23 20 The spindle zero speed NC contact ee een ee Points of attention 1 About the connection method and points of attention of PLC input part X refer to chapter IV 2 The contacts are classified into the four types Normally open contact NC contact whether the contact is normally open or NC is set by the parameters Among them the input points are connected with normally open or NC contact are set by KAPA parameter in PLC About the details refer to KAPA parameter introduction 3 When use the ladder diagram the users can add the new function into the undefined input part but pay attention to that if the undefined part is used the ladder diagram should be rewritten 4 Operation panel The function of USER1 button K11 1 0
256. s shown as figure 1 1 1 GSK218MC CNC system 2 Additional operation panel optional parts 3 CNC AC servo drive unit step drive unit 4 Servo motor step motor 5 AC transformer The strong GSK218MC current CNC system cabinet of the machine AC Drive unit transformer Fig 1 1 1 2 The System Installation and Connection Firstly check whether the parts such as CNC system the drive unit the motor and the photoelectric encoder etc to be installed are all complete in good condition and matched with each other The installation of CNC system must be fixed and some space should be reserved around CNC system so the heat of the system can be sent out CNC system should be installed the place in which is each to operate avoiding the scrap iron and coolant The strong and weak currents should be separated and the power supply of CNC system and the drive unit should be provided by the isolation transformer and the power supply should be parted with 129 S 3 D 2 O 5 D o o S 3 D 2 O 5 D o 5 Cr IS Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System the strong current of the machine The various cables should keep far away from AC contractor to reduce the interference It would be best that the photoelectric encoder the limit signal and the emergency stop signal should be connected with CNC system directly rather than come through the strong curr
257. s ON the indicator flashing means the magazine is executing zero return 2 The magazine is without the zero return switch a In JOG mode press CCW or CW to make No 1 toolcase in the magazine rotate to the tool change position b In MDI mode set K010 6 as 1 c Press MAG ZERO in ZERO RETURN mode until its indicator is ON d Set K010 6 as O 3 The spindle positioning angle and tool change coordinate position regulation A About the spindle positioning angle regulation please refer to the manual of the spindle drive unit Regulating steps of the spindle positioning angle example SETTING 1 Input the system debugging password Continuously press on MDI keypad to enter the password interface in MDI mode input the system debugging password 888888 and then press INPUT key PASSWARD CORRECT is shown on the left bottom corner on the screen 2 Press PROGRAM CONTROL key on MDI keypad on EIPLCPAR interface press KPAR softkey the system enters the check and setting interface of the relay in keep type press four direction keys on the keypad and the cursor can position whether K010 7 magazine enters the SAVE debugging mode Press the numerical 1 the enter key and then the data column reminds KPAR download is done which means saving is successful and the magazine debugging mode becomes valid the advance and retraction of the magazine can be operated without any condition
258. s by numbers from 0 to 127 Output W Output coil W 1 when it reaches to the resetting value W 0 means it does not reach to it Note TIMER performs once each 8ms its setting unit is ms and 8ms is the performance radix complete 8ms if it is insufficient For example the setting is 54ms 54 6 8 6 complete 2ms the actual performance is 56ms The time of the timer is set in the TMR of the PLCPAR under the program controlled interface The sequence number of the timer may be detected its range by the system directly The alarm may occur when the sequence number repeats or exceeds its range 27 SWINJOA JU A O Q u 3 gt Q euin oA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q 5 12 TMRB Fixed Timer Function Delay conducting timer Format Timer Timer Presetting accuracy number time Fig 5 12 1 Controllable condition ACT 0 close the timer ACT 1 start the timer Refer to the figure for details o EN TIMER Setting time Fig 5 12 2 Parameter TIMER Fix the timer number it is indicates by xxx it expresses by number from O to 127 Table 5 12 1 Timer accuracy accuracy number 8ms 0 From8ms to 524 280s Scan period from 0 to the 1 level program From 48ms to 31 456min Scan period from 0 to the 1 level program Presetting time The time setting of the fixed timer its numerical range is 0 655395 Output W Output coil W 1 when it reaches to the preset
259. s classified as type A or B which are set by bit parameter N0 677 167 S 3 D 2 O 5 D o o Cr IS Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Zero return type using stepper motor with no encoder A Mechanical zero return direction The block installed on the machine sliding plate I lt T ME T3 T2 T1 Remark When the system executes zero return the machine sliding plate moves positively the proximity switch on T1 ofthe inductive chunk functions firstly and the system decelerates Pay attention to that T1 width of should be enough for deceleration from zero return to FL speed set by 499 T1 width should not be less than 25mm the width of T2 should be greater than the measured diameter of the proximity switch T3 is the zero in position point and the proximity switch is PNP NC type i e the switch is OFF in T1 and T3 and it is ON in T2 and the other connection states PNP NC proximity switch The proximity switch signal is sent to GSK218MC deceleration zero Signals meanwhile Mechanical zero type of GSK218MC system A Fig 4 8 1 S 3 D 2 O 5 D o 5 168 Chapter Four Machine Debugging Zero return type using stepper motor with no encoder B Mechanical zero return direction ___ A The block installed on the machine sliding plate PNP NC proximity Remark When the system executes the returning
260. s only taken as the reference and the ladder diagram varies as the different machine type 2 The Allocation and Definitions of I O Address and Internal Software Components in CNC PLC of GSK218MC List I Definition of the input signal interfaces ADDRESS SIGNAL INTERFACE DEFINITION CONTACT Pe ae EA X000 4 X840 Z axis positive limit signal NC contact X000 5 XS40 Z axis negative limit signal NC contact X000 6 XS40 18 The 4 axis positive limit NC contact a a NE X000 7 XS40 The 4 axis negative limit NC contact signal 183 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System ADDRESS SIGNAL INTERFACE DEFINITION CONTACT MU wmmack C PNNOS seco X001 0 XS40 X axis zero return NC contact OUT cetera X001 1 XS40 21 Y axis zero return NC contact BUND X001 2 XS40 Z axis zero return NC contact a memora X001 3 XS40 22 The 4 axis zero return NC contact A o X001 4 XS40 24 The emergency stop NC contact B BED switch 218MC integration Kic X001 5 XS40 12 The external cycle start Normally BEN P X001 6 XS40 25 The external feed hold Normally BH O e X001 7 XS40 13 The lubrication pressure or Normally NEN X002 0 XS41 1 The air supply pressure Normally EN X002 1 XS41 The jumping signal Normally X002 2 XS41 2 The index worktable Normally A gin open conet X002 3 XS41 15 The index worktable Normally me Setter eps X002 4 XS41 17 The external Normally clamping releasing tool open contact X002 5 XS41 5 T
261. sn t clamp the tool the manipulator tool hold is executed or the manipulator is returned to the origin Trouble shooting Check whether the output of YO 2 is normal or not Check whether the input of X2 6 is normal or not Alarm information 1274 The tool advance can t be operated because the manipulator isn t in the origin Reason The tool post retraction is executed because the manipulator isn t in the origin Trouble shooting The manipulator is returned to the origin Alarm information 1275 The tool retraction can t be operated because the manipulator isn t in the origin Reason The tool post retraction is executed when the manipulator isn t in the origin Trouble shooting The manipulator is returned to the origin Alarm information 1276 The manipulator can t be rotated because it isn t in the origin Reason The toolpot rotation movement is executed when the manipulator isn t in the origin Trouble shooting The manipulator is returned to the origin Alarm information 1277 The toolpot can t be rotated because the tool case isn t in the level position Reason The toolpot rotation movement is executed when the toolcase isn t in the level position Trouble shooting The toolcase is returned to the level position Check whether the input of X5 2 is normal or not Alarm information 1278 The manipulator can t be operated when Z axis doesn t return to the ge reference position Reason The manipulator is executed while Z axis hasn
262. spindle tool number and the magazine tool number can be reset the operation can be executed normally About the details please refer to Chapter II The usage method and maintenance of GSK218MC CNC system with the turret magazine 219 Or Ia Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System 4 Note of GSK218MC CNC System with the Turret Magazine Macro Program 220 091001 G65 H81 P50 Q 1003 R1 M50 G69 G50 G15 G80 G40 G65 H81 P20 Q 1000 R1 M19 G91 G49 G30 ZO M21 N20 M19 G91 G49 G28 Z0 G65 H81 P30 Q 1002 R1 M22 G91 G49 G30 Z0 N30 M17 M24 M51 N50 M99 A Program name Miscellaneous lock machine lock transfer to N50 when spindle tool number T code program end The tool change begins and detect whether the condition of tool change is satisfied or not otherwise the system alarms Canceling the relative modes The spindle tool NO 0 that is to say the spindle doesn t load the tool transfer to N20 and the tool return code isnt executed Spindle positioning return to the tool change coordinate point Tool return gt magazine rotation magazine advance spindle releasing tool Return to the mechanical origin T code tool number 0 transfer to N30 and the tool searching code isn t executed Tool searching gt tool rotation tool advance spindle tool releasing Return to the tool change coordinate point The spindle clamping tool The magazine retraction The tool ch
263. springing the environment menu by clicking the right key of the mouse 2 Select the Edit Alt E Cutting T of the main menu 3 Shortcut key Ctrl X The cut content is placed to the clipboard which is copied to the ladder diagram by the paste operation 4 3 3 2 Copy There are three ways for carrying out this operation after the ladder diagram area to be copied is selected 1 Select the copy after springing out the environment menu by clicking the right key of the mouse 2 Select the Edit Alt E Copy C of the main menu 3 Shortcut key Ctrl C The selected content after copying is put to the clipboard which is copied to the ladder diagram by the paste operation 4 3 3 3 Pasting There are three ways for carrying out this operation after the ladder diagram area to be pasted is selected 1 Select the pasting after springing out the environment menu by clicking the right key of the mouse 2 Select the Edit Alt E Pasting P of the main menu 3 Shortcut key Ctrl V 4 3 3 4 Deletion There are three ways for carrying out this operation after the ladder diagram area to be deleted is selected 1 Select the basis code Deletion node after springing out the environment menu by clicking the right key of the mouse once 2 Click the Deletion node button on the editing bar 3 Shortcut key Delete 122 Chapter Four The User Explanation of the Ladder Diagram Software EDIT 4 3 3 5 Insertion Line
264. ss and the configuration and definition of the internal software components for the initial definition of the input address 3 2 2 Y Address on the MDI Panel There are 8 types from the addresses Y 12 Y19 of which these addresses are corresponding with the button input on the MDI panel one by one User can not modify its signal definition PLC system reports to the CNC system keyboard module after calculating and it is used for displaying the indicator signal The corresponding relationships of each prompt light Table 3 2 2 1 Key board indicator PLC PLC Key board indicator output output address address Edit key indicator Y12 0 Spindle orientation indicator Y15 7 Auto key indicator Y12 1 Tool magazine zero return indicator Y16 0 MDI key indicator Y12 2 Tool magazine CW indicator Y16 1 Zero return key 12 3 Tool magazine CCW indicator Y16 2 indicator Single step key Y124 Tool magazine tool pivoting tool Y16 3 indicator infeed indicator Manual key indicator y125 Fool magazine tool retraction 46 4 indicator MPG key indicator y126 loo magazine clamping releasing 4c indicator DNC key indicator Y 12 7 Tool magazine tool changer Y16 6 13 euin oA q L O e y 3 3 e 1 fimdicator amp S Y axis zero return Y17 2 indicator Y13 3 Zkey indicator euin oA Y axis zero retum y434 44TH key indicator Y17 3 indicator Z axis zero retur y435
265. ss the key and therefore a new row is inserted above the specified row of the cursor The followings rows are moved down in turn SHIFT eo Row deletion The cursor is positioned at the destination row press the on the SHIFT DELETE panel till the indicator above the is lighted up then press the key the 105 S D O D o 106 Gr ESE ES Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System current row is then deleted the following rows are moved up in return e Block deletion The cursor is positioned as the start position where to be deleted then input DELETE the address of the output coil of the desired deletion block and then press the key on the panel Search Directly input the component name what you want to reach it will display at the data column on screen upward or downward search by pressing the or after inputting SAVE e Save The modified ladder diagram is saved by pressing the key Illustrations of the ladder diagram programming 1 The cursor is positioned as the start place of the programming position a normally opened contact symbol occurs at the cursor s positioning directly input the component name X1 4 INPUT affirm it by pressing the key the component X001 4 appears on the current cursor position 2 Rightward one place of the cursor press the 44 soft key a symbol of the normally closed contact occurs at the cursor positioning directly input compone
266. ssible Warning Before installing programming and operating the machine thoroughly read this manual and user manual issued by the machine manufacturer and rigidly operate the machine based upon the requirement of this manual otherwise possibly causing damage to the workpiece and or machine itself or injury to the user Notice e The product functions and technical indexes such as accuracy velocity described in this manual are only for this machine which installs the CNC system of this product The actual function configuration and technical capacity are determined by the machine manufacturer and the function configurations of the CNC machine and technical indexes are subjected on the manual issued by the machine builder All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice Preface and Precaution Safety Precautions m Transportation and Storage Do not pile up the carton over 6 layers Do not climb stand on the carton and as well not place the heave objects on it Do not drag or move the product using the cables connected with the product Do not crash or scratch the panel and display screen Avoid damp sunshine and raining on the product carton m Open carton to inspect e Ensure that it is your purchased product after opening the carton e Check whether the product is damaged during transporting e Confirm whether each part is prepared or damaged based upon the packing list e Conta
267. stant or address and the specified data length 1 byte or 2 bytes of the data Format Data length specifying Specifying 0 Constant 1 1 byte length 1 Address 2 2 bytes length Fig 5 23 2 S1 S2 The contents both the comparison 1 and comparison 2 can be regarded as constant and address number Address number R X Y F G K A D and C Output W 0 Inputting data gt comparison data W 1 Inputting data lt comparison data 5 24 COIN Consistency Comparison Function This code can be detected whether the input value and comparison value are consistent Format nee Length 4 S2 COIN format Comparison W specifying Input value value address Fig 5 24 1 Controllable condition ACT 0 Do not perform the COIN code W value is invariable ACT 1 Perform the COIN code Parameter Length Input the specified format constant or address and the specified data length 1 byte or 2 38 Chapter Five PLC Function Code bytes of the data EJEA 5 c Format Data length 3 specifying specifying ia 0 Constant 1 1 byte length 1 Address 2 2 bytes length Fig 5 24 2 S1 The input data can be specified both the constant and storage address S2 Compare the storage address of the data Output W W 0 input value comparison value W 1 input value comparison value y A O Q Q 3 3 Q 5 25 MOVN Data Transmission Function The data of the source address or the specifi
268. stem D Magazine zero return operation The magazine zero return operation is divided into zero return switch and without zero return switch 1 The magazine is with the zero return switch press MAG ZERO in ZERO RETURN mode and the zero return is completed when the indicator is ON the indicator flashing means the magazine is executing zero return 2 The magazine is without the zero return switch a In JOG mode press CCW or CW to make the No 1 toolcase in the magazine rotate to the tool change position b In MDI mode set K010 6 as 1 c In zero return mode press MAG ZEOR RETURN button until MAG ZERO RETURN indicator is on d Set K010 6 as O 3 The spindle positioning angle and tool change coordinate position regulation About the spindle positioning angle regulation please refer to the manual of the spindle drive unit Appendix The setting method of DAP01 positioning angle 1 Power on the control device default to display on LED ir 2 Press lt key to enter the monitoring mode the system displays 3 There are 25 display states in Monitor mode and select the state to look by pressing A v Find dp APo The motor encoder is the positioning one and the spindle encoder is taken as the positioning one dp SPo can be found press I1 the system displays E 0 or other numerical values 4 Torealize the spindle positioning function the motor rotor should be rotated at l
269. system parameter number 0 19 ALMS ALM5 ALM4 ALMZ ALMY ALMX ALMX 71 X axis drive alarm high level is valid 0 X axis drive alarm low level is valid ALMY 1 Y axis drive alarm high level is valid 0 Y axis drive alarm low level is valid ALMZ 1 Z axis drive alarm high level is valid 0 Z axis drive alarm low level is valid ALMA 1 The 4 axis drive alarm high level is valid 0 The 4 axis drive alarm low level is valid ALM5 1 The 5 axis drive alarm high level is valid 164 Chapter Four Machine Debugging 0 The 5 axis drive alarm low level is valid ALMS 1 The spindle drive unit alarm high level is valid 0 The spindle drive unit alarm low level is valid The system parameter number 01611 FALM SALM SALM 1 Ignore the spindle drive unit alarm 0 Not ignore the spindle drive unit alarm FALM 1 Ignore the feeding axis drive unit alarm 0 Not ignore the feeding axis drive unit alarm 4 7 The Machine Screw Pitch Compensation o Setting the compensation amount 1 The set compensation amount is relative with the position relation between the zero point and the compensation point the mechanical traverse direction and the compensation interval etc 2 The compensation amount of the compensation point N N 0 1 2 3 127 is set by the mechanical errors of intervals N and N 1 3 The mechanical zero point is take
270. t find the indexed data SWINJOA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q 5 30 ADD Binary Addition Function This function code is used for the add operation of the 1 byte or 2 bytes binary data The addend data and the add operation output the data should be set the storage address with the corresponding byte length Format cS ssaJppe uonippe indmo ynsa uone nojeo o O D O lt JO SsoJppe Controllable condition Reset RST RST 0 Release the reset RST 1 Reset W 0 Performance code ACT ACT 0 Do not perform ADD code W keeps invariable ACT 1 Perform ADD code Parameter Length Specify the data length 1 byte or 2 bytes and the specifying method of the addend constant or address EIER Format Data length specifying specifying 0 Constant 1 1 byte length 1 Address 2 2 bytes length Fig 5 30 2 43 euin oA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q S1 Specify the storage addend address S2 The specifying method of the addend is determined by the specification of the Length S3 Specify the output operation address Output W 0 Operation is normal W 1 Operation is abnormal When the add operation result exceeds the specified data length W 1 5 31 SUB Binary Subtraction Function This function code is used for the subtraction of the 1 byte or 2 bytes binary data The minuend data and the subtraction output data should be set the storage address with the
271. t returned to the 2 reference position Trouble shooting 1 G30 G91 Z0 is executed to return to the 2 reference position 2 When the manipulator isn t in the origin and returning to the 2 reference position by G30 G91 ZO in AUTO mode isn t allowed to be executed the 2 reference position can be returned in JOG mode Firstly Z axis is returned to the mechanical zero position in ZERO RETURN mode and set K11 1 as 1 returning to the tool change position in JOG mode pressing USER key to execute returning to the 2 reference position in JOG mode Alarm information 1279 The manipulator origin position is detected abnormal Reason When the system is powered on the system detects that the manipulator isn t in the origin 246 Appendix Two The Usage Guide or X3 4 signal isn t received in the time set by T110 after the system commands the manipulator to be returned to the origin Trouble shooting 1 The manipulator is returned to the origin in the debugging mode 2 Adjust the time set by T110 Alarm information 1280 Compel to stop the magazine rotating due to the abnormal Reason 1 After the magazine sending the rotation command the pulse signal sent by the magazine counting switch X5 3 X5 4 isn t received in the time set by T108 2 During the magazine rotating the system detects that the magazine counting switch state is O or 1 which exceeds the time set by T103 Trouble shooting 1 The output Y3 0 and Y3 1 of
272. tating 2000 T aston tenn JOGrode oetdporine T0102 The detection delay time Greater than rotating 2000 7 stmomogaine nang Cemtro T0103 The detection delay time Greater than rotating 3000 O memener medo o T0104 Setting the detection delay Greater than the tool 5000 TUM ect atea eean T0105 Setting the detection delay Greater than the tool 5000 omenaa aamin 257 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System NOTE SETTING RANGE INITIAL T0106 The time delay unit of the Greater or equal to O BN RM T0107 The time delay unit of the Greater or equal to O BN o OS T0108 The detection time delay Greater than rotating T0109 The time of compelling Greater than rotating to stop the magazine one tool post time rotation due to the abnormal T0110 Detection delay time of Greater than the time the manipulator tool of the manipulator hold and origin return from the origin to the tool hold point T0111 Detection delay time of the Greater than the time manipulator falling downward of the manipulator for tool change falling downward for rotating 180 and lifting upward Points for attention 1 The above parameters TMR is relative with the magazine performance such as the type and the rotation speed etc please properly set according to the magazine performance index 2 If the above parameters TMR are set improperly the alarm occurs which may cause the abnormal tool change Thro
273. ted II o Meets Soest 1289 A011 1 he index worktable clamping detected Bal ell dni 1290 A011 2 he index worktable clamping device 1291 A011 3 The index worktable can t rotate because it NNNM 1292 A011 4 he index worktable can t be moved because it doesn t clamp 1293 A011 5 Cycle start can t be executed because the A ma en 1294 A011 6 The index worktable can t start because it II o o 1360 A020 0 The lubrication pressure low or the oil level 234 Appendix Two The Usage Guide PMC A ADDRESS ALARM CONTENT ALARM NUMBER iw A0 0 A19 7 are the system red alarms after the alarm the system stops running A20 0 A31 7 are user defined blue alarms After the alarm the system continues to run without affecting the normal usage Details of some PMC alarm diagnosis information Alarm information 1200 The air pressure is detected abnormal Reason Trouble shooting Detect the state of X002 0 Alarm information 1201 The lubrication oil is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1202 The lubricating motor is detected abnormal Reason User defined Trouble shooting Alarm information 1203 The cooling motor is overload Reason The cooling motor overload Trouble shooting Detect whether the cooling motor is normal or not after confirming switch on the overload protection switch Alarm information 1204 The chip removal motor is detected abnormal Reason User d
274. ter NOT to the specified address Chapter Four PLC Basis Code Code explanation e WRT and WRT NOT codes are the coil drive code of the output relay and internal relay but the input relay can not be used The paratactic WRT command can be used multiply but it can not output with double coil c Refer to the following programming 2 RD X002 1 3 X002 1 Y003 7 WRT Y003 7 EROS peus RD NOT F100 3 WRT G120 0 Fig 4 1 1 D A O Q Q 3 gt Q 4 2 AND AND NOT Codes Mnemonic symbol and function Table 4 2 1 Mnemonic symbol AND Logic AND AND NOT Logic AND after the specified state is NOT Code explanation e Connect 1 contact with series connection by using AND AND NOT code The numbers of series connection contacts are unconstrained and this code can be used for dozens of times Refer to the following programming RD X002 1 AND NOT F100 3 AND X008 6 WRT Y003 7 X002 1 F100 3 X008 6 Y003 7 AN F gt Fig 4 2 1 4 3 OR OR NOT Codes Mnemonic symbol and function Table 4 3 1 Logic OR OR NOT Logic OR after the specified state is NOT Code explanation e Connect 1 contact with series connection using the OR and OR NOT code 19 euin oA J A O Q Q 3 gt Q e OR OR NOT is started from the step of this code it can be connected with series connection with the abovementioned RD RD NOT code step Refer to the following prog
275. the 1 bit with the consecutive number of the 8 bit to be decoded 1 byte or 16 bit two bytes S3 Decode result address Specify an address output the decoding result The register area must be output with one byte or two bytes areas For example ACT E eor ro oe ome Fig 5 15 2 When ACT 1 F10 8 R4 0000 0001 When ACT 1 F10 9 R4 0000 0010 SWINJOA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q When ACT 1 F10 15 R4 1000 0000 5 16 COD Binary System Code Conversion Function COD code may automatically produce a corresponding table under its function block when it inputs the data capacity which is used for inputting the conversion table data for the user 10 grids of each row in this table it calculates based upon the quotient 1 if it can not be exactly divided but the capacity data does not change and then the address of the table number may not display Format RST ACT yewo ubue SSoJppe ejep jndui UOISJOAUOO S ssouppe Bui4jidads UOISJOAUOD ay Jo Ayoedeo ejep zujbue ejep 1ndino UOISJOGAUOO ZS Fig 5 16 1 Table 5 16 2 3 euin oA y A O Q Q 3 3 Q Controllable condition Reset RST RST 0 Do not reset RST 1 W resets the error may output Working code ACT ACT 0 Do not perform the COD ACT 1 Perform the COD The value of the conversion input data address S1 is regarded as the table number of the conversion table the corres
276. the above A F steps are operated but the magazine cannot normally run the magazine is executed CCW CW infeed and retraction in JOG mode to check whether each operation of magazine is normal through the following chapter The magazine manual and zero return operation 2 The magazine manual and zero return operation Operation aim Check whether each operation of the magazine is normal The detailed operation as below A The magazine usage is valid 1 The following bit parameters should be set because the magazine type is the turret one Bit parameter 53 0 21 bit parameter 53 1 0 bit parameter 53 2 0 bit parameter 53 3 0 2 In PLC KAPA parameter K001 0 is set as 1 B Confirming the magazine rotation direction In JOG mode press MAG CW and the magazine rotates according to the prescribed negative direction of the machine press MAG CCW and the magazine rotates according to the prescribed positive direction of the machine otherwise the tool magazine count will be disorder to cause that the tool change is executed wrongly which can be resolved by regulating the phase sequence of the motor 216 Appendix One The Usage Guide of the Ladder Diagram C The magazine zero return The magazine zero return operation is divided into zero return switch and without zero return switch 1 The magazine is with the zero return switch press MAG ZERO in ZERO RETURN mode and the zero return is completed when the indicator i
277. ting W 0 when it does not reach Note As for the sequence of the timer the system may check its range automatically if the repeated sequence or out of the range the system may alarm The presetting time in timer is solidified in the ROM along with the ladder diagram so the time of the timer only can be changed by modifying the ladder diagram file 5 13 TMRC TIMER Function Delay conducting timer Format Timer Timer Fig 5 13 1 28 Chapter Five PLC Function Code Controllable condition ACT 0 close the timer ACT 1 start the timer Refer to the following figure for details aor 000 LLL w OL gt TIMER Setting time EMT Fig 5 13 2 Parameter TIMER The timer number indicates by xxx xxx expresses by numbers from 0 to 127 Table 5 12 1 Timer accuracy accuracy number 8ms 0 From8ms to 524 280s Scan period from 0 to the 1 level program From 48ms to 31 456 min Scan period from 0 to the 1 level program NE UN y A O Q Q 3 3 Q 2 From sto546 min Scan period from 0 to the 1st level program _ 10s 3 FromiOstot82h__ Scan period from 0 to the 1 level program Output W Output coil W 1 when it reaches to the presetting W 0 when it does not reach to it Note The time of the timer is set in the TMR in the PLCPAR controlling by the program surface TMRC and TMR timers are shared with a same address so the TMRC and TMR timers can not be repeat
278. ting switch is normally open type When the magazine is normal it is 0 The magazine CW CCW rotation in position is normally open type When the magazine is normal it is 1 For example The magazine is without the zero return switch each detection switch is normally open type the parameters should be set as D KO10 1 0 K010 2 0 K010 3 0 K010 4 0 K010 5 0 Setting the magazine capacity Input the magazine capacity in DATA100 and CTR100 Points for attention 1 The magazine capacity is the toolcase number of the magazine 2 The setting value of DATA100 and CTR100 must be less than 100 For example When the magazine capacity is 24 set DATA100 as 24 CTR100 as 24 E Setting the tool number in the magazine 256 The data list D001 D099 respectively correspond to the tool case NO 1 99 in the magazine and the setting value D001 D099 in the data list respectively correspond to NO 1 99 tool number in the tool case Points for attention 1 Same tool number except for 0 can t be set in D001 D099 otherwise the system alarms during the tool change 2 The setting range of tool number should satisfy the requirement set by data parameter 0206 otherwise the system alarms during executing T code For example When the magazine capacity is 24 if 1 24 is set in Di D24 in turn 8 tool case is rotated into the tool change position and then the tool is changed during executing T8M6 If 10 20 30 240 are executed i
279. tion 1 F and M codes with Reserved in F signal table cannot be used 2 M22 M50 and M51 are only valid when the tool change is being executed which can t run separately while they can run independently in MDI mode during the magazine debugging mode 3 Usage and Maintenance of GSK218MC CNC SYSTEM with the Disc Magazine 1 The magazine installation and setting the related PLC parameters Operation aim Ensure the ladder diagram fit to the allocation of the magazine A The requirements for the machine when the ladder diagram with the disc magazine 1 The machine has the spindle tool automatically clamping releasing device which has the normally open in position check switch The spindle has the positioning function and its positioning angle can be regulated The tool magazine capacity must be less than 100 4 The tool magazine can execute CCW CW The tool magazine has the count switch forward in position check switch and retraction in position check switch 6 The tool magazine has zero return switch optional 2 The connection of circuits relative with the magazine 1 Input I cL Joc POSITION INTERFACE REMARK XS41 X002 4 external Optional M tool control X002 5 The tool releasing Normally open contact detection pe XS41 X002 6 The tool clamping Normally open contact 254 Appendix Two The Usage Guide a Ten X841 X003 2 manu open pw wm X841 X003 3 manipulator Normally open
280. tion return G28 has been completed and its current position is performed in the in position area e The detection of the reference position return has been completed and its current position is performed in the in position area The signal becomes 0 when the following states are displayed e When the machine tool moves from the reference position When the ESP signal occurs When the servo alarm generates Return to the zero deceleration signal detection DECX G017 0 DECY G017 1 DECZ G017 2 DECA G017 3 Type Input signal Function These signal decreases the move speed of the manual reference position return so that it approximates to the reference position at the low speed 60 Chapter Four Reference Position Return 4 2 Return to the Reference Position Detection Signal The detection allowance signal of the 1 reference position PREF10 PREF13 G056 0 3 The detection allowance signal of the 2 reference position PREF20 PREF23 G057 0 3 The detection allowance signal of the 3 reference position PREF30 PREF33 G058 0 3 The detection allowance signal of the 4 reference position PREF40 PREF43 G059 0 3 Type Input signal Function When this signal is set to 1 the end signal F42 F43 and F44 of the reference position return is enabled These signals are one to one corresponding with the axes Table 4 2 1 PREF 0 Allowance signal of reference position detection along with X axis PR
281. tool list D001 D099 or the tool number specified by T code is repeated Trouble shooting After executing the correct T codes M06 code is executed Alarm information 1260 Cycle start can t be operated during returning tool change position in JOG mode Reason When K011 1 1 Returning tool change position is valid in JOG mode pressing start button in AUTO MDI or DNC mode causes the alarm Trouble shooting Set K011 1 as O Alarm information 1261 The tool retraction can t be operated because Z axis isn t in the origin Reason The magazine tool retraction is executed when the magazine is in the tool advance position and Z axis isn t in the origin Trouble shooting After Z axis is returned to the origin the tool retraction is operated Alarm information 1262 Exceed the safety position Reason Z axis exceeds the tool change position when Z axis is moved and the manipulator is in the tool hold position Trouble shooting Move Z axis and make Z axis coordinate is between the tool change position and the origin Alarm information 1263 Caution to operate the manipulator adjusting mode Reason The system alarms when K012 7 is set as 1 and the alarm reminds the manipulator enters the debugging mode the alarm and the interlock signals relative with the magazine is 244 Appendix Two The Usage Guide released completely so caution to operate Otherwise the abnormal may damage the mechanical part Trouble shooting
282. tually the sequence program inside the system can be converted into corresponding PLC code even if it is input by the relay symbol y A O Q Q 3 3 Q The basis codes are commonly used codes when designing the sequence programming which are performed one digit calculation The basis command codes of the GSK218MC are shown below Table 4 1 Codename name BLAN Rage mers concer nee address set to STO address is set to STO after its state is set to NOT o er Deu the logic calculation result to the specified address WRT a Output the logic calculation result after NOT to the specified address AND Logic AND AND NOT Logic AND after the specified state is set to NOT Logic OR OR NOT Logic OR after the specified state is set to NOT OR STK Right shift one bit of the stacked memory after STO and ST1 logic OR AND STK Right shift one bit of the stacked memory after STO and ST1 logic AND 4 1 RD RD NOT WRT and WRT NOT Codes Mnemonic symbol and function Mnemonic symbol Table 4 1 1 Left shift one bit of the content of the register the signal state specified by address is set to STO RD NOT Left shift one bit of the content of the register the signal state specified by address is set to STO after it is set to NOT WRT Output the logic calculation result to the specified address the logic calculation result to the specified address WRT ar ee eee ee the logic calculation result af
283. tware can be operated by clicking Lad Edit Exe twice When the Ladder01 ladder diagram in the LadFile folder is opened in the software the interface is shown below 117 S c 3 D O Lo D Q F O 3 c D O Le D Q O Gr ES FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System GSK Lad Editor Ladder01 grp PRIEJIES amp File Edit View Window Help o X Dal 556 2318 AE dE a ESSET irae FOT0 0 K005 2 F008 2 G001 0 0001 A O ESP Emergency stop 001 4 F010 0 0002 K005 0 X006 7 K007 5 0003 G001 0 F001 1 0004 R087 5 X000 0 K005 2 F008 1 G012 0 0005 O L1 Overtravel R087 6 X000 2 K005 2 F008 1 G012 1 0006 O L2 Overtravel R087 7 x000 4 K005 2 F008 1 G012 2 0007 O L3 Overtravel R088 0 x000 6 K005 2 F008 1 G012 3 0008 O L4 Overtravel 000 0 X000 1 R088 1 K005 2 FO008 1 G013 0 0009 O L1 Overtravel K006 0 K006 0 0010 x000 2 X000 3 R088 2 K005 2 F008 1 G013 1 0011 CH L2 Overtravel K006 1 K006 1 0012 x000 4 X000 5 R088 3 K005 2 FO008 1 G013 2 0013 O x L3 Overtravel K006 2 K006 2 0014 x000 6 X000 7 R088 4 K005 2 FO008 1 G013 3 0015 O L4 Overtravel v x IHT Emergency Stop Ready NUM Fig 4 2 1 1 4 2 2 Function Introduction File menu The file menu includes some program files namely the new open and save which can be produced some functions such as the performable ladder diagram file or binary system file printi
284. ugh the basic steps of A F the ladder diagram is matched with the magazine allocation If the magazine can t normal run yet CW CCW rotation the tool advance and the tool retraction in JOG mode can be set and operated in the following section and each operation of the magazine can be checked normal or not 2 Magazine manual and zero return operation Operation aim Check each operation of the magazine is normal or not The detailed steps are as below A The magazine usage valid 1 Because the magazine type is the disc the following bit parameters should be set Bit parameter 53 0720 Bit parameter 53 1 0 Bit parameter 53 2 0 Bit parameter 53 370 2 KAPA parameter of PMC K001 0 is set as 1 258 Appendix Two The Usage Guide B The magazine entering debugging mode 1 The magazine debugging PMC parameter can be set for the magazine holding tool chuck the spindle concentric degree and Z axis tool hold position When K012 7 is set as 1 the condition limit of the manipulator running can be cancelled and the magazine debugging state is entered After debugging set K12 7 as O and the data can t be exchanged 2 Steps of manipulator running in JOG mode in the normal situation Z axis returns to the tool change point In MDI mode G30G91Z0 is recorded and Z axis is returned to the manipulator tool change point Set K10 7 as 1 Spindle orientation Press spindle orientation in JOG mode the orientation completes Toolcase ve
285. unction Select the rapid traverse rate of the JOG feed or increment feed 58 Chapter Three Manual Operation When the signal turns into 1 the operation of the controllable unit is shown below e The controllable unit performs the JOG feed or increment feed at the rapid traverse rate The rapid traverse override is enabled e The signal shifts to O from 1 or is reverse and its feedrate decreases to 0 during the JOG feed or increment feed The feed axis and the direction selection signal can be kept to 1 during the acceleration or deceleration Signal address 7 6 5 4 3 H2 H1 0 em v j J j sor j j J Jw 9 j v cos poo poe fe gt 3 2 MPG Manual Pulse Generator Single Step Feed S D Brief In the MPG single step feed mode the machine tool can be slightly moved by rotating the MPG or single stop operation The machine tool movement axis can be selected by the MPG feed axis signal or axis movement signal Signal Single step feed amount signal selection G026 0 G026 3 Type Input signal Function The move distance from the pulse is generated by pressing the axis movement key once during this signal is selected the single step feed Signal MPG feed amount signal selection G026 4 G026 6 Type Input signal Function The move distance from a pulse is generated by rotating each unit from the MPG uonounJ S D uonounJ Gr Miser Installation an
286. uonounJ S D uonounJ Gr Miser Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System CHAPTER FIVE AUTOMATICAL OPERATION 5 1 Cycle Start Feed Hold Brief Start the automatical operation Cycle start In the storage mode the automatic operation start signal ST is set to 1 during the DNC or MDI mode the CNC enters into the automatic operation start state then operates oignal ST is ignored in the following conditions The ST signal is ignored other than the mode of the Auto DNC and MDI The ST signal is ignored when the feed dwell signal SP is set to 1 The ST signal is ignored when the ESP signal ESP is set to 1 The ST signal is ignored when the RESET key on the MDI is pressed The ST signal is ignored when the CNC is in the alarm state The ST signal is ignored when the automatic operation has been started The ST signal is ignored when the program restart signal is set to 1 The ST signal is ignored when the CNC is being searched a sequence number 0 JO 0 c n9 In the automatic operation the CNC enters into the feed hold state and stops in the following states 1 When the feed hold signal SP is set to 1 2 Single block code is ended during the single block operates 3 MDI operation has been completed 4 The alarm occurs in the CNC 5 The single block code has been completed after it becomes the other automatic operations or edit mode In the automatic operation the CN
287. us function in Section for spindle S code I O point control for the output condition and performance process Note S code range S1 S8 the alarm may occur if it exceeds its range S1 S8 are separately corresponding with the F address signal FO22 0 7 User can refer to three gears S1 S2 and S3 of the configurated ladder diagram from the system So S4 S8 can not be used the corresponding ladder diagram should be added if the user needs 8 1 2 Analog Spindle Brief Analog spindle is that the spindle speed is controlled by the analog voltage value of the CNC CNC can be controlled the spindle speed of which the S code turns into the analog voltage value outputting to the machine s spindle Actual output analog voltage value spindle controlled S value x spindle override Signal GSK218MC integration CNC system Spindle override SOV1 X31 0 Spindle override SOV2 X31 1 Spindle override SOV4 X31 2 Type Input signal Function This signal specifies that the spindle controls the override change of the S value 78 Chapter Eight Spindle Speed Function GSK 218MC H and GSK 218MC V CNC system Spindle override code detection signal G019 0 G019 2 Input Input signal Function It is the spindle override code detection signal Spindle override code detection signal has 3 binary system code signals which are corresponding with the override So the spindle override can be selected based upon the 10 unit within the
288. use it isn t released Reason When the index worktable is released the index worktable rotation movement is executed Trouble shooting Firstly the index worktable clamping movement is executed and the index worktable rotation movement is operated or the index worktable is adjusted into the debugging mode K12 6 is set as 1 and then the index worktable rotation movement is executed Alarm information 1292 The index worktable can t be moved because it isn t clamped Reason When the index worktable is released the feeding axis is executed the movement 247 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Trouble shooting After executing the index worktable clamping and then the feeding axis is executed the movement Or the index worktable is adjusted to the debugging mode K12 6 is set as 1 and feeding axis movement is operated Alarm information 1293 Cycle start can t be operated because the safety door isn t closed Reason The cycle start button is pressed when the safety door detection switch K8 3 1 is started and the safety door isn t closed X4 5 0 Trouble shooting Executing cycle start is after closing the safety door Alarm information 1294 Cycle start can t be executed because the index worktable isn t clamped Reason The cycle start button is pressed when the index worktable is released Trouble shooting Cycle start is executed after executing the index worktable clamping Alarm informatio
289. ustomer can be reached Formula Numerator 4C Zw G Denominator L t A Z5 S 3 D 2 O 5 D o o G Electrical gear ratio L Screw lead C The minimum output code unit of the system mm pulse C The linear revolution of the photoelectric encoder the linear of GSK motor encoder is C 2500 Zum The number of gear teeth at the end of the screw h With the change gear 161 S 3 D 2 O 5 D H Cr Wx Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Zp The number of gear teeth at the end of the motor System side Frequency of the numerator NO 160 NO 161 NO 162 and NO 163 of the system parameters the code frequency multiplication coefficient Frequency of the denominator NO 165 NO 166 NO 167 and NO 168 of the system parameters the code fractional frequency coefficient Digit servo side Frequency of the numerator Parameter PA12 The code frequency multiplication coefficient Frequency of the denominator Parameter PA13 The code fractional frequency coefficient Example 1 If the screw lead is 8mm the minimum output code unit of the system is 0 001mm and the motor coder linear number is 2500 so 5 4 _ C Zw _4X2500 1 udi 7 Zo 8 o001 1 Then the data parameters NO 160 CMRX 5 NO 165 CMDX 4 The parameter setting of the system gear ratio is same as that of the digit servo gear ratio If it is equipped with the digit s
290. utput the spindle code of the reverse rotation in some canned cycle The following canned cycles are required the spindle control Reverse tapping cycle G74 Fine boring cycle G76 Tapping cycle G84 Boring cycle G86 Counter boring cycle G87 Boring cycle G88 Using the frequently used miscellaneous functions for the spindle control Refer to the miscellaneous function explanations M03 Spindle positive M04 Spindle negative MO5 Spindle stop M19 Spindle orientation Tapping signal Output the tapping signal during the tapping cycle The tapping signal also can be output when tapping cycle G code is enabled Override The cutting feed override is always set to 100 during tapping Feed hold The move may not stop immediately during tapping when pressing the feed hold key The move stops when the tool returns to the R panel Dry run Whether the dry run is enabled during the TDR bit 5 of parameter No 12 defines tapping 83 Gr Miser Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System Signal Tapping signal TAP lt F001 5 gt Type Output signal Function It informs that the system is in the tapping mode Output condition This signal is 1 When the system is in the tapping cycle mode G74 and G84 When the system is in the tapping mode G63 This signal is O When the system is neither in the tapping cycle mode nor in the tapping mode When the reset or ESP signal is input Signal address 7 6 5 H4 3 2 H
291. vely feed when the feed axis J1 J1 J2 J2 J3 and J3 and direction selection signal are set to 1 In incremental feed the machine is single step feed The JOG feedrate can be adjusted by its override disk S D The single step distance can be selected by the incremental step G026 0 G026 3 uonounJ Signal Feed axis and direction selection J1 J4 G27 0 G27 3 J1 J4 G28 0 G28 3 Type Input signal Function Select the required feed axis and direction in the JOG feed or incremental feed The and in the signal name are indicated as feed direction the digit is corresponding with the controllable axis 1 the X axis feed 2 the Y axis feed 3 the Z axis feed 4 the A axis feed Feed Feed Operation When the signal is set to 1 the controllable unit is shown below The controllable unit can be moved the specified axis along the specified direction when the JOG feed or incremental feed is enabled In JOG feed the controllable unit consecutively moves the controllable axis when the signal is set to 1 In the incremental feed the controllable unit makes that the specified axis feeds based upon the specified step distance and then it stops The controllable unit may not stop feeding even if this signal is set to O during the axis feed Move the axis again and the signal will be set to O then to 1 Manual rapid feed selection signal RT G024 7 Type Input signal F
292. ws F002 Spine sop Mos FO0303 Automatic tool change M Fono Comon M9 Fora coomo O O mo F0i2 Aaksdamig MM oms Aaxisreleasing me F0250 Spindle tool releasing code MW F0251 Spindle tool damping code MiB F0283 Canceling spindle exact stop mo F0252 Spindle exactstopcode Spindle neutral gear Gear F032 5 control is valid without the gear change switch M2 F026 4 Manipulator operation beginning MEER M23 F026 5 Tool case vertical command F026 6 Tool case level command Turning on chip removal hydrovalve Turning off chip removal F027 6 hydrovalve e l reges mao F0322 Rigid tappingcode mao Foo Programend Starting the spiral chip removal M35 FO28 1 transmitter Switching off the spiral chip M36 rF028 2 removal transmitter F026 7 Starting blowing the spindle Automatic tool change F027 1 beginning F027 2 Automatic tool change end Whether the tool is correct or not mE F027 3 after tool change 253 Gr WIE FE Installation and Connection Manual of GSK218MC CNC System M CODE F SIGNAL FUNCTION REMARK Whether the spindle is with a Reserved M55 F027 4 tool or not The manipulator reaching the Reserved M56 FO29 0 M tool hold position The manipulator falling Reserved M57 FO29 1 downward for rotating 180 and lifting The manipulator Reserved M58 FO29 2 l returning to the origin Points for atten

GSK218MC series Connection and PLC Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents